The URL can be used to link to this page

20130293 Project Spec Manual 07162013 FI�.E C�� . . .. �..�� . . . . �L1�YC0 Pro�ect Specificat�on Manual THEART&SCIENCEOEBU[4D[NG FO UM. R Proposed Remodel for: OBEE Credit Union 1201 Yelm Avenue East Yelm, Washington Contract Set Project No: 601-01234 July 16, 2013 ��T��`T��.J JUL 2 4 2013 B'�`Y�.:� OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 � Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 Issue Date DIVISION 1 —GENERAL REOUIREMENTS � 01100 General Conditions 7/16/2013 DIVISION 2—SITE CONSTRUCTION 02070 Selective Structure Demolition 7/16/2013 DNISION 3—CONCRETE 03300 Cast In Place Concrete 7/16/2013 DIVISION 4—MASONRY Not Required DIVISION 5—METALS Not Required DIVISION 6—WOOD AND PLASTICS 06100 Rough Carpentry 7/l6/2013 06402 Interior Architectural Woodwork 7/16/2013 06640 Plastic Paneling 7/16/2013 DIVISION 7—THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07210 Building Insulation 7/16/2013 07415 Composite Wall Panels 7/16/2013 07920 Joint Sealants 7/16/2013 DIVISION 8—DOORS.WINDOWS AND GLASS 081 l0 Steel Doors and Frames 7/16/2013 08211 Flush Wood Doors 7/16/2013 08212 Stile and Rail Wood Doc�rs 7/16/2013 08311 Access Doors and Frames 7/16/2013 08411 Aluminum Entrances 7/16/2013 08710 Door Hardware 7/16/2013 08713 Automatic Doar Operators 7/16/2013 08800 Glazing 7/16/2013 DIVISION 9—FINISHES 09260 Gypswn Board Assemblies 7/16/2013 09310 Ceramic Tile � 7/l6/2013 0951] Acoustical Tile Ceilings 7/l6/2013 09651 Resilient Tile Flooring 7/16/2013 09653 Resilient Wall Base and Accessories 7/16/2013 09680 Carpet 7/]6/2013 09720 Wall Covering 7/16/2013 09900 Painting 7/16/2013 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 1 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-]3 DNISION 10—SPECIALTIES 10155 Toilet Coinpartinents 7/16/2013 10505 Metal Lockers 7/16/2013 10522 Fire Extinguisher Cabinets 7/16/2013 10523 Fire Extinguishers 7/16/2013 ]0801 Toilet and Bath Accessories 7/16/2013 DIVISION 11—EQUIPMENT 11451 Residential Appliances 7/16/2013 11700 Security Equipment 7/16/2013 DIVISION 12—FURNISHINGS 12000 Furniture 7/16/2013 DIVISION 13—SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION Not Required DIVISION 14—CONVEYING S�'STEMS Not Required DIVISION 15—MECHANICAL Not Required DIVISION 16—ELECTRICAL Not Required TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 2 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm, Washington 07-16-13 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION TABLE OF ARTICLES 1 . Contract Documents 2 . Architect 3. Owner 4 . Contractor 5 . Subcontractors 6. Work by Owner or by Separate Contractors 7 . Miscellaneous Provisions 8 . Time 9. Payments and Completion 10. Protection of Persons and Property 11. Insurance 12 . Changes in the Work 13. Uncovering and Correction of Work 14 . Termination of Contract 15. Resolution of Claims 16. Hazardous Materials 3323905 Clayco / Financial Services GENERAL CONDITIONS TABLE OF ARTICLES OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm, Washington 07-16-13 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION ARTICLE 1 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS l. l DEFINITIONS 1. 1. 1 The Contract The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction. This Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes all prior negotiations, representations, or agreements, either written or oral. The Contract may be amended or modified only by a Modification as defined in Subparagraph 1 . 1. 2 . Nothing contained in the Contract Documents shall create any contractual relationship between the Owner and the Architect, or the Owner and any Subcontractor or Sub- subcontractor or between t.he Contractor and Architect. References to the "Agreement" shall mean and refer to the specifically modified Agreement between Owner and Contract��:�r. 1. 1 .2 The Contract Documents The Contract Documents consist of the Agreement, the General Conditions of the Contract, all Drawings, Specifications, and all Modifications issued after execution of the Contract. A Modification is (1) a written amendment to the Contract signed by all parties, (2) a Change Order, (3) a written interpretation issued by the Architect, and (4) a written order for a minor change in the Work issued ��y the Architect pursuant to Paragraph 12. 4 . 1. 1 .3 The Work The Work comprises the completed construction required by the Contract Documents and includes all labor necessary to produce such construction, and all materials and equipment incorporated or to be incorporated in such construction. 1. 1.4 The Project The Project is the total construction of which the Work performed under the Contract Documents may k>e whole or a part, and which may include construction by the Owner _�r by Separate Contractors. 1. 1. 5 The Drawings and Specifications The Drawings and Specifi�:ations have been reviewed and accepted by the Owner prior to the execution of the Contract. These Drawings and Specifications fully define the scope of the Work to be performed by Contractor and are not �ubject to further review by the Owner or the Owner' s Construction Inspe��tor as to the scope of the Work required under the Contract Documents. 'I'hese Drawings and Specifications are subject to change as to the scope of the Work with an appropriate adjustment in the Contract Sum as provided herein. In addition, the Architect from time to time may issue Supplemental Drawings or Field Orders further defining these Drawings and Specifications, as the Architect deems necessary. 3323905 Clayco GENERAL CONDITIONS 0 Bee Credit Union 1 of 37 ' OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm, Washington 07-16-13 1 . 1. 6 The Owner' s Construction Inspector Owner may appoint, at Owner' s expense, a Construction Inspector to act as the Owner' s representative during construction on questions concerning Contractor' s compliance with the Contract Documents. The Owner may at any time, or from time to time, designate any person or organization to act as Owner' s Construction Inspector by notifying the Contractor in writing of such designation. Such designation shall be effective upon receipt of such notice by the Contractor. Any such designation may be withdrawn or terminated by Owner at any time by notice to Contractor. 1.2 EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT 1.2. 1 The Agreement shall be signed by the Owner and Contractor. 1.2 .2 By executing the Contract, Contractor represents that it has visited the site, familiarized itself with the local conditions under which the Work is to be performed, and correlated its observations with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2.3 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by any one shall be as binding as if required by all. Work not covered in the Contract Documents will not be required unless it is consistent therewith and is reasonably inferable therefrom as being necessary to produce the indicated results. Words and abbreviations which have well-known technical or trade meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings. 1 .2 .4 The organization of the Specifications into divisions, sections and articles, and the arrangement of Drawings shall not control Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade. 1 . 3 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF DOCUMENTS 1 . 3. 1 (There is no Subparagraph 1. 3. 1) . 1.3.2 All Drawings, Specifications and all copies thereof furnished by the Architect under the Coritract, are and shall remain its property and are not to be used on any other. project. With the exception of one copy of all such Drawings, Specifications and any other documents prepared by the Architect which are a part of the Contract for each party, all other copies of such documents are to �_>e returned to the Architect at the completion of the Work. ARTICLE 2 ARCHITECT 2 . 1 DEFINITION 2 . 1 . 1 The Architect is the person or organization authorized to practice architecture in the State where the Project is located and who is responsible for the preparation of and who has signed the Drawings and 3323905 Clayco GENERAL CONDITIONS 0 Bee Credit Union 2 of 37 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm, Washington 07-16-13 Specifications for the Project identified in the Contract between the Owner and Contractor, he is the Architect of Record for the Project. The Owner recognizes that the Architect is an affiliate of Contractor. The term Architect means the Architect or its authorized representative. 2 .2 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 2 .2 . 1 The Architect will visit the site periodically to determine in general if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. However, the Architect will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on-site observations to check the quality or quantity of the Work. 2.2 .2 The Architect ��ill not be responsible for and will not have control or charge of const.ruction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or for safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, and will not be responsible for Contractor' s failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Architect will not be responsible for or have control or charge over the acts or omissions of Contractor, Subcontractors, or any of their agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the Work. 2 .2 .3 The Architect and the Owner' s Construction Inspector shall at all times have access tc> the Work wherever it is in preparation and progress. Contractor shal.l provide reasonable facilities for such access so the Architect and the Owner' s Construction Inspector may perform their functions under the Contrar_t Documents. 2 .2. 4 The Architect shall furnish interpretations and clarifications of the drawings and specifications, by means of additional drawings, addenda or otherwise, as are necessary for the proper execution and progress of the Project. 2 .2 . 5 The Architect' s decisions in matters relating to artistic effect will be final if consistent with the intent of the Contract Documents. 2 .2 . 6 (There is no Suk>paragraph 2 .2. 6. ) 2 .2 .7 The Architect will review and approve or take other appropriate action upon Contractor' s submittals such as Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, but only for conformance with the design concept of the Work and with the information givel; in the Contract Documents. The Architect' s approval of a specific it<_m shall not indicate approval of an assembly of which the item is a component. 2 .2 . 8 The Architect stiall assist Contractor in conducting observations to determine the dates of ��ubstantial Completion and final completion. 2 .2 . 9 The Architect m.::y provide one or more Project Representatives to assist the Architect in cai-rying out its responsibilities at the site. 2.2 . 10 In the event of the death, resignation, refusal or inability to act of the Architect, or if for any other reason Contractor decides to do so, Contractor may designate another architect (who must be licensed to practice in the State in which the Project is located, and who may be an 3323905 Clayco GENERAL CONDITIONS 0 Bee Credit Union 3 of 37 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm, Washington 07-16-13 employee of Contractor, cr otherwise affiliated with Contractor) , as the Architect for purposes of the Contract. ARTICLE 3 OWNER 3. 1 DEFINITION 3. 1. 1 The Owner is �he person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and masculine in gender. The term Owner means the Owner or its authorized representative. 3.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER 3.2 . 1 The Owner shall., at the request of Contractor, at the time of execution of the Agreemenr, furnish to Contractor reasonable evidence that he has made financial arrangements to fulfill its obligations under the Contract. Unless such reasonable evidence is furnished, Contractor is not required to commence the Work. The Owner shall disclose all information known to the Owner regarding the presence of hazardous materials, pollutants, contaminants, or other environmental, subsurface or concealed conditions at the Project' s site. 3.2 .2 The Owner shall furnish all surveys and subsoil investigations describing the physical characteristics, legal limitations and utility locations for the site of the Project, and a legal description of the site. 3.2 .3 Except as provic�ed in Subparagraph 4 . 7 . 1, the Owner shall secure and pay for necessary approvals, easements, assessments and charges required for the construction, use or occupancy of permanent structures or for permanent changes in existing facilities. 3. 2 .4 Information or services under the Owner' s control shall be furnished by the Owner with reasonable promptness to avoid delay in the orderly progress of the Work. 3.2 . 5 (There is no Suk:>paragraph 3.2.5. ) 3.2. 6 The Owner shall issue all instructions to Contractor. 3.2 .7 The foregoing are in addition to other duties and responsibilities of the Owner enumerated herein and especially those in respect to Work by Owr.er or by Separate Contractors, Payments and Completion, and Insurance =.n Articles 6, 9 and 11, respectively. 3323905 Clayco GENERAL CONDITIONS 0 Bee Credit Union 4 of 37 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm, Washington 07-16-13 3.3 OWNER'S RIGHT T0 STOP THE WORK 3. 3. 1 If Contractor fails to correct defective Work as required by Paragraph 13.2 or persistently fails to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner, by a written order signed personally may order Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such arder has been eliminated; however, this right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor or any other person or entity, except to the extent required by Subparagraph 6. 1 . 3. 3. 4 OWNER' S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK 3. 4 . 1 If Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails within seven days after receipt of written notice from the Owner to commence and continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner may, after seven days following receipt by Contractor of an additional written notice and without prejudice to any other remedy he may have, make good such def.iciencies. In such case an appropriate Change Order shall be issued deducting from the payments then or thereafter due Contractor the cost of correcting such deficiencies. If the payments then or thereafter due Contra;�tor are not sufficient to cover such amount, Contractor shall pay the c:ifference to the Owner. ARTICLE 4 Contractor 4 . 1 DEFINITION 4 . 1. 1 Contractor is the Contractor for the Work required by the Contract Documents and is identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents. 4 .2 REVIEW OF DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS 4 .2. 1 Contractor represents to the Owner that it has reviewed the Drawings and Specifications incorporated in the Contract. 4 . 3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES 4 . 3. 1 Contractor shal.;_ supervise and direct the Work, using reasonable skill and attention. It :�hall be solely responsible for all construction means, methods, technique:;, sequences and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work ur�der the Contract. 4 . 3.2 Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for the negligent or wrongful acts and omissions of its employees, Subcontractors and their agents and employees, and other persons performing any of the Work under a contract with Contractor. 3323905 Clayco GENERAL CONDITIONS O Bee Credit Union 5 of 37 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm, Washington 07-16-13 4 .3.3 Contractor sha11 not be relieved from its obligations to perform the Work in accordance wit:h the Contract Documents either by the activities or duties of the Architect, or by inspections, tests or approvals required or performed under Paragraph 7 .7 by persons other than Contractor. 4 . 4 LABOR AND MATERIALS 4 . 4 . 1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall provide and pay for all labor, materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, transportation, and other facilities and services necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work. 4 . 4 .2 Contractor sha11 at all times enforce discipline and good order among its employees and shall not employ on the Work any unfit person or anyone not skilled in the task assigned. 4. 4 .3 During construction in remodeled areas, Contractor wherever possible shall use existing water, heat and utilities with the utility charges for this usage paid by the Owner. If it is necessary for construction purposes to �ring in separate metered utility services, the usage charges for these separate services shall be paid for by Contractor during construction. For new construction, if new utility service connections are required, Contractor shall pay the metered utility charges for all service during ronstruction. As areas of the buildings are substantially completed and occupied by the Owner the utility usage bills shall be pro-rated between Contractor and the Owner based upon the ratio of unoccupied and occupied areas and the dates of occupancy by the Owner. 4 . 5 WARRANTY Contractor warrants to the Owner that all materials and equipment furnished under this Contract will be new unless otherwise specified, and that all new materials and equipment will be entitled to all warranties given by the manufacturer. All such materials and equipment not so conforming to these standards may be considered defective. If required by the Architect or the Owner' s Construction Inspector, Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of any such materials and equipment. The Contractor' s warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse, modifications not executed by the Contractor, improper or insufficient maintenance, improper operation, or normal wear and tear and normal usage. All applicable warranties related to the Work, whether pursuant to this Section ��r other provisions of the Contract Documents or applicable law, shall commence as of the date of Substantial Completion of the Work, and shall term�nate and expire one (1) year after Substantial Completion of the Work, except for third party warranties expressly provided in the Contract ��ocuments or any other written warranty given to the Owner at the end of trie Project. THE CONTRACTOR HEREBY DISCLAIMS ANY AND ALL EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABIL_�TY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY WARRANTED HEREIN. THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES WHICH EXTEND BEYOND THE DESCRIPTION ON THE FACE HEREOF. 4 . 6 TAXES 4 . 6. 1. The Contractor shall pay consumer, use and similar taxes for the Work or portions thereof provided by the Contractor which are legally enacted prior to the date of the Contract, whether or not yet effective or 3323905 Clayco GENERAL CONDITIONS 0 Bee Credit Union 6 of 37 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm, Washington 07-16-13 merely scheduled to go into effect. Owner' s Sales Tax Obligation: Washington Retail Sales 'I'axes are not included in the Contract Sum, and will be billed to the Owrier separately with each monthly Application for Payment. With each mont:hly Application for Payment, Contractor shall include with such invoice an amount separately stated equal to 8 . 7% of the amount otherwise due, sa-�d inclusion to cover the applicable washington Retail Sales Tax respectirig the amounts for which application for payment is otherwise being made. Washington Retail Sales Taxes shall be computed on the entire amount due for each pay application, before reduction for retainage. Owner shall make payment to Contractor of the applicable Washington Retail Sales Taxes invoiced by Contractor at the same time that payment is otherwise due �vith respect to Contractor' s monthly Applications for Payment. No retainage shall be withheld from payments for Washington Retail Sales Taxes. After receipt of payment of the Washington Retail Sales Taxes from the Owner, Contractor shall promptly remit all Contractor' s tax payments to the appropriate Washington taxing authorities as required by Washington 1aw. 4 .7 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES 4 . 7 . 1 Contractor or its subcontractors shall secure and pay all permits, governmental fees and licenses required by Contractor or its subcontractors for the proper execution and completion of the Work, which are applicable at the time the Agreement between the Owner and Contractor is signed. Contractor has no obligation to secure or pay for any permits, licenses or connection fees of the Owner, such as impact fees, traffic mitigation, school and special use fees, governmental imposed service fees, occupancy permits or util.ity usage fees for post-construction use by the Owner or any similar charges based on utility flow rates or assessments based on utility system amortization. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to make certain that the Drawings and Specifications are in accordance with applicable� laws, statutes, building codes and regulations in effect at the time of Contract. Any fees, charges, costs or licenses required by any laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of any public authority for the purpose of reviewing, inspecting, approving, checking or filing plans and specifications other than the direct fees charged for the filing of the plans and specifications for the issuance of a building permit shall be paid by the Owner and are not the responsibility of Contractor. 4 .7.2 Contractor or its subcontractors shall give all notices and comply with all laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders of any public authority bearirlg on the performance of the Work. 4 .7 .3 If Contractor observes that the Contract is at variance therewith in any respect, it shall promptly notify the Architect and the Owner, in writing, and any necessary changes shall be adjusted by appropriate Modification. If Contractor performs any Work knowing it to be contrary to such laws, orclinances, rules and regulations, and without such notice Contractor shall a�,sume full responsibility therefor and shall bear all costs attributable thereto. 4 . 8 ALLOWANCES 4 . 8. 1 Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum all allowances stated in the Contract Documents. Items covered by these allowances shall 3323905 Clayco GENERAL CONDITIONS O Bee Credit Union 7 of 37 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm, Washington 07-16-13 be supplied for such amourits and by such persons as the Owner may direct, but Contractor shall not be required to employ persons against whom Contractor makes a reasonable objection. 4 . 8 .2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents: . 1. these all;�wances shall cover the cost to Contractor, less applicable trade discount, of the materials and equipment required by the allowance delivered at the site, and all applicable taxes; .2 Contractor' s cost for unloading and handling on the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and other expenses contemplated for the original allowance shall be included in the Contract Sum and not in the allowance; . 3 whenever the cost is more than or less than the allowance, the Contract Sum shall be adjusted accordingly by Change Order, the amount of which will recognize changes, if any, in handling costs on the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and other expenses which were not included in the Contract Sum. 4 . 8 .3 Materials and equipment under an allowance shall be selected by the Owner in sufficient time to avoid delay in the Work. 4 . 9 SUPERINTENDENT 4 . 9. 1 Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance at the Project site during the progress of the Work. The superintendent shall represent Contractor and all communications conc:erning compliance with the Drawings and Specifications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to Contractor. Important communications shall be confirmed in writing. Other communications shall be so confirmed on written request in each case. 4 . 10 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE . 4 . 10. 1 Contractor, wit}1in 60 days after the execution of the Contract, shall prepare and submit for the Owner' s approval an estimated construction schedule for the Work. The construction schedule shall be related to the entire Project to the extent required by the Contract. This schedule shall indicate the dates for the starting and completion of the various stages of construction and shall bE� revised as required by the conditions of the Work. This construction schedule is developed solely for the purpose of job management by Contractor. It should be used only for general planning purposes by the Owner and is not to be construed as a part of the contractual performance by Contractor to the Owner. 4 . 11 DOCUMENTS AND S�_MPLES AT THE SITE 4 . 11. 1 Contractor shal�� maintain at the site for the Owner one record copy of all Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders and other Modifications, in good order and marked currently to record all changes made during construction, and approved Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples. These shall be available to the Owner' s Construction Inspector and shall be delivered to Owner' s Construction Inspector for the Owner upon completion of the Work. 3323905 Clayco GENERAL CONDITIONS 0 Bee Credit Union 8 of 37 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm, Washington 07-16-13 4 . 12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES 4 . 12. 1 Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules and other data specially prepared for the Work by the Contractor or any Subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work. 4 . 12.2 Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams and other information furnished by Contractor to illustrat.e a material, product or system for some portion of the Work. 4 . 12.3 Samples are physical examples furnished by Contractor to illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship and establish standards by which the Work will be judged. 4 . 12. 4 The Contractor shall review, stamp with its approval and submit, with reasonable promptness and in orderly sequence so as to cause no delay in the Work or in the work of any other contractor, all Shop Drawings and Samples required by the Contract or subsequently by the Architect as covered by Modifications . Shop Drawings and Samples shall be properly identified as specified, c:�r as the Architect may require. At the time of submission Contractor shall inform the Architect and the Owner in writing of any deviation in the Shop Drawings or Samples from the requirements of the Contract. Contractor shall make any corrections required by the Architect and shall resubmit the required number of corrected copies of Shop Drawings or new Samples until approved. Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings to revisions other than the correct�.ons requested by the Architect on previous submissions . 4 . 12. 5 By approving and submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, the Contractor represents that it has determined and verified all materials, field measurements, and field construction criteria related thereto, or will do so, and that it has checked and coordinated the information contained wit}lin such submittals with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Dc:>cuments. 4 . 12. 6 Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for any deviation from the requirements of the Contract Documents by the Architect' s approval of Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples under Subparagraph 2 .2. 14 unless Contractor has specifically informed the Owner in writing of such deviati.on at the time of submission and the Owner has given written approval to the specific deviation. Contractor shall not be relieved from responsibility for errors or omissions in the Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples by the Owner' s approval thereof. 4 . 12. 7 Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples, to revisions other than those requested by the Owner on previous submittals. 4 . 12. 8 The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services which constitute the practice of architecture or engineering unless such services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless the Contractor needs to provide such 3323905 Clayco GENERAL CONDITIONS 0 Bee Credit Union 9 of 37 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm, Washington 07-16-13 services in order to c�rry out the Contractor' s responsibilities for construction means, met},.ods, techniques, sequences and procedures. No portion of the Work requiring submission of a Shop Drawing, Product Data or Sample shall be commence�l until the submittal has been approved by the Architect as provided in Subparagraph 2.2 . 14 and when required by Subparagraph 4 . 12 . 6. Al1 such portions of the Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals. One (1) set of approved Shop Drawings shall be forwarded to the Owner at the same time as sent to the subcontractors. 4 . 13 USE OF SITE 4 . 13. 1 Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by law, ordinances, permits and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with any materials or equipment. 4 . 14 CUTTING AND PATCHING OF WORK 4 . 14. 1 Contractor shal.l be responsible for all cutting, fitting or patching that may be requ;yred to complete the Work or to make its several parts fit together properl,�. 4 . 14 .2 Contractor sha11 not damage or endanger any portion of the Work or the work of the Owner or any separate Contractors by cutting, patching or otherwise altering any work, or by excavation. Contractor shall not cut or otherwise alter the wo�k of the Owner or any separate Contractor except with the written consent of the Owner and of such separate Contractor. Contractor shall not unreasonably withhold from the Owner or any separate Contractor its consent to ��utting or otherwise altering the Work. 4 . 15 CLEANING UP 4 . 15. 1 Contractor at all times shall keep the premises free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish caused by its operations. At the completion of the Wcrk it shall remove all its waste materials and rubbish from and about the Project as well as all its tools, construction equipment, machinery and surplus materials. 4 . 15.2 If Contractor fails to clean up at the completion of the Work, after written request from. the Owner, the Owner may do so as provided in Paragraph 3. 4 and the cost thereof shall be charged to Contractor. 4 . 16 COMMUNICATIONS 4 . 16. 1 Contractor shall forward all communications directly to the Owner. 4 . 17 ROYALTIES AND PATENTS 4 . 17. 1 Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. It shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent rights and shall save the Owner harmless from loss on account thereof, except that the Owner shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular design, process or the product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is specified, but if Contractor has reason to believe that the design, process or product specified is an infringement of a patent, he shall be responsible for such loss unless it promptly gives such information to the Owner. 3323905 Clayco GENERAL CONDITIONS 0 Bee Credit Union 10 of 37 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm, Washington 07-16-13 4. 18 INDEMNIFICATION 4 . 18. 1 Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and its agents and employees from and against all claims, damages, losses and expenses including attornPys' fees arising out of or resulting from the performance of the Work, to the extent that any such claim, damage, loss or expense (1) is attributab�e to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself) including the loss of use resulting therefrom, and (2) is caused by any negligent act or omi.ssion of Contractor, any subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not it is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder, provided, however, that the foregoing agreement to indemnify shall not extend to liability claims, damages, loss or expenses, including attorney' s fees, arising out of (a) the preparation or approval of maps, drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, Change Orders, designs or specifications by the Owner, or the agents or employees of the Owner; (b) or the giving or failure to give directions or instructions by the Owner, or the agents, or employees of Owner, where such giving or failure to give directions or instructions is the primary cause of bodily injury to persons or damage to property; or (c) the negligence or wrongful misconduct of the Owner. To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor, its Subcontractors , and the agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses inclu:iing but not limited to attorney' s fees, arising out of or resulting from the Project, provided that such claim, damage, loss and expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property, but only to the extent caused by the Owner ' s breach of this Contract, or the negligent acts or omissions of the c:wner, the Owner' s separate contractors (as contemplated in subparagraph 6. 1 . 1) , anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable (other than the Contractor and its Subccntractors) , regardless of whether or not such claim, damage, loss or expense is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. Such obligatio.:, shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obl:igations of indemnity which would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Section 4 . 18 . The obligations of the Contractor and the Owner herein are subject to the provisions of Subparagraphs 7 . 4.3 and 11 . 3. 6. 4 . 18.2 In any and all claims against the Owner or any of their agents or employees by any employee of Contractor, any Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, thE: indemnification obligation under this Paragraph 4 .18 shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensa�:ion or benefits payable by or for Contractor or any Subcontractor under wc�:kers' or workmen' s compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other empl::>yee benefit acts. 3323905 Clayco GENERAL CONDITIONS 0 Bee Credit Union 11 of 37 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm, Washington 07-16-13 ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS 5 . 1 DEFINITION 5. 1. 1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with Contractor to perform any of the Work at the site. The term Subcontractor is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and masculine in gender and means a Subcontractor or its authorized representative. The term Subcontractor does not include any separate Contractor or its subcontractors. 5. 1.2 A sub-subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to perform any of the Work at the site. The term Sub-subcc�ntractor is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and masculine in gender and means a Sub- subcontractor or an authorized representative thereof. 5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK 5.2 . 1 Contractor, as soon as practicable after the execution of the Contract, shall furnish to the Owner in writing for acceptance a list of names of the Subcontractors proposed for the principal portions of the Work. If the Owner, after due investigation has reasonable objection to any Subcontractor on such list and does not accept such Subcontractor, he shall promptly so notify ��ontractor in writing. Failure of the Owner to make objection promptly to any Subcontractor on the list shall constitute acceptance of such Subcontractor. Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, the Owner here:�y agrees that the Contractor may subcontract portions of the Work to the Contractor or divisions of the Contractor pursuant to a subcontract agreement, and the subcontract sum thereof shall constitute a cost of the work. 5.2.2 Contractor sha11 not contract with any such proposed person or entity to whom the Owner has made reasonable objection under the provisions of Subparagraph 5.2 . 1. Contractor shall not be required to contract with anyone whom it has a reasonable objection. 5 .2.3 If the Owner refuses to accept any Subcontractor or person or organization on a list submitted by Contractor in response to the requirements of the Contract, Contractor shall submit an acceptable substitute and the Contract Sum shall be increased or decreased by the difference in cost occasioned by such substitution and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued; however, no increase in the Contract Sum shall be allowed for any such substitution unless Contractor has acted promptly and responsively in submitting for acceptance any list or lists of names as required by Subpar�agraph 5 .2 . 1 . 5 .2 .4 Contractor shall make no substitution for any Subcontractor, person or entity previously selected if the Owner makes reasonable objection to such substitution. 3323905 Clayco GENERAL CONDITIONS 0 Bee Credit Union 12 of 37 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm, Washington 07-16-13 5 . 3 SUBCONTRACTURAL� RELATIONS 5.3. 1 By an appropriate agreement, written where legally required for validity, Contractor shall require each Subcontractor, to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to Contractor by the terms of the Contract Documents, and to assume toward Contractor all the obligations and responsi��ilities which Contractor, by these Documents, assumes toward the Owner. Said agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the Owner under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that the subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights, and shall allow to the Subcontractor, unless specifically provided otherwise in the Contractor-Subcontractor agreement, the benefit of all rights, remedies and redress against Contractor that Contractor, by these Documents, has against the Owner. Where appropriate, Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with its Sub-subcontractors. Contractor shall make available to each proposed Subcontractor, prior to the execution of the Subcontract, copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound by this Paragraph 5.3, and identify to the Subcontractor any terms and conditions of the proposed Subcontract which may be at variance with the Contract Documents. Each Subcontractor shall similarly make copies of such Documents available to its Sub-subcontractors. ARTICLE 6 WORK BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 6. 1 OWNER' S RIGHT TO PERFORM WORK AND TO AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS 6. 1 . 1 The Owner reserves the right to perform work related to the Project with its own forces, and to award separate contracts in connection with other portions of the Project or other work on the site under these or similar Conditions of the Contract including insurance and waiver' s of subrogation. The Contract.or shall be entitled to a Change Order for any delays or increases of the Cost of the Work caused by such separate contractors. If Contractor claims that delay or additional cost is involved because of such action by the Owner, he shall make such claim as provided elsewhere in the C:ontract Documents. 6. 1.2 When separate ��ontracts are awarded for different portions of the Project or other work on the site, the term Contractor in the Contract Documents in each case sha::Ll mean the Contractor who executes each separate Owner-Contractor Agreement . 6. 1 .3 The Owner will provide for the coordination of the work of its own forces and of each separate Contractor with the Work of Contractor, who shall cooperate therewith as provided in Paragraph 6.2 . 3323905 Clayco GENERAL CONDITIONS 0 Bee Credit Union 13 of 37 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm, Washington 07-16-13 6. 1. 4 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, when the Owner performs construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner' s own forces or pursuant to separate contracts with other contractors, the Owner shall be deemed to be subject to the same obligations and to have the same rights which apply to the Contractor under the Conditions of the Contract. If the Owner awards separate contracts with any other contractors for any work on the Project site during the performance of the Work, then the Owner shall cause each and every other contractor (and their subcontractors of any tier) to name the Contractor as an additional insured on all liability insurance policies maintained by such other contractor (and their subcontractors of any tier) to the extent such policies cover liabilities relating to the Project or other work being performed at the Project site. The Owner shall furnish to the Contractor written evidence that suct7 insurance is in effect and that the Contractor has been named an additional insured. 6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY 6.2 . 1 Contractor shall afford the Owner and separate Contractors reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and the execution of their work, and shall connect and coordinate its Work with theirs as required by the Contract Documents. 6. 2 .2 If any part of ��ontractor' s Work depends for proper execution or results upon the work of the Owner or any separate Contractor, Contractor shall, prior to proceeding with the Work, promptly report to the Owner any apparent discrepancies or defects in such other work that render it unsuitable for such proper execution and results. Failure of Contractor so to report shall constitute an acceptance of the Owner' s or separate Contractors' work as fit and proper to receive its Work, except as to defects which may subsequently become apparent in such work by others after the execution of Contractcr' s Work. 6.2 .3 Any costs caused by defective or ill-timed work shall be borne by the party responsible ther2for. 6.2.4 Should Contractor wrongfully cause damage to the work or property of the Owner, or to other work on the site, Contractor shall promptly remedy such damage as provided in Subparagraph 10.2 .5. 6.2 .5 Should Contractor wrongfully cause damage to the work or property of any separate contractor, Contractor shall upon due notice promptly attempt to sett�e with such other contractor by agreement, or otherwise to resolve the dispute. If such separate contractor sues or initiates an arbitration proceeding against the Owner on account of any damage alleged to have been caused by CONTRACTOR, the Owner shall notify Contractor, who shall defend such proceedings at the Owner' s expense, and if any judgment or award against the Owner arises therefrom Contractor shall pay or satisfy it a.zd shall reimburse the Owner for all attorneys ' fees and court or arbitrati.on costs which the Owner has incurred. 3323905 Clayco GENERAL CONDITIONS 0 Bee Credit Union 14 of 37 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm, Washington 07-16-13 6. 3 OWNER' S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP 6. 3. 1 If a dispute arises between Contractor and separate Contractors as to their responsibility for cleaning up as required by Paragraph 4 . 15, the Owner may clean up and charge the cost thereof to the Contractors responsible therefor. ARTICLE 7 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 7 . 1 GOVERNING LAW 7. 1. 1 The Contract shall be governed by the law of the place where the Project is located. 7 .2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS 7.2 . 1 The Owner and Contractor each binds itself, its partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives to the other party hereto and to the partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives of such other party in respect to all covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. Neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract or sublet it as a whole without the written consent of the other, nor shall Contr.actor assign any moneys due or to become due to it hereunder, without the previous written consent of the Owner. 7 . 3 WRITTEN NOTICE 7 . 3. 1 Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or member of the firm or entity or to an officer of the corporation for whom it was intended, or if delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail to the last known business address of the intended recipient. 7 . 4 CLAIMS FOR DAMAGE 7 . 4 . 1 Should either party to the Contract suffer injury or damage to person or property because of any act or omission of the other party or of any of its employees, agents or others for whose acts he is legally liable, claim shall be made in writ=ing to such other party within 21 days after the first observance of such irzjury or damage. 7 . 4 .2 Claims for Additional. Time 7 . 4 .2 . 1 If the Contractor wishes to make Claim for an increase in the Contract Time, written notice as provided herein shall be given. The Contractor' s Claim shall include an estimate of cost and of probable effect of delay on progress of the Work. In the case of a continuing delay only one Claim is necessary. 3323905 Clayco GENERAL CONDITIONS 0 Bee Credit Union 15 of 37 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm, Washington 07-16-13 7 . 4 .2 .2 If adverse weather conditions or adverse site conditions caused by adverse weather are the basis for a Claim for additional time, such Claim shall be documented by data substantiating that either (i) adverse weather conditions were abnormal for the period of time, could not have been reasonably anticipated and had an adverse effect on the scheduled construction, or (ii) adverse weather conditions prevented the type of Work then scheduled, or (iii) adverse site conditions caused by adverse weather prevented the type of Work then scheduled. 7 . 4 .3 Claims for Consequential Damages. 7 . 4 .3. 1 The Contractor and Owner waive Claims against each other for consequential damages arising out of or relating to this Contract. This mutual waiver includes: . 1 damages incurred by the Owner for rental expenses, for losses of use, income, profit, financing, business and reputation, and for loss of management or employee productivity or of the services of such persons; and .2 damages incurred by the Contractor for principal office expenses including the compensation of personnel stationed there, for° losses of financing, business and reputation, and for loss of profit except anticipated profit arising directly from the Work. 7 .5 BOND 7 . 5 . 1 If requested tc> do so by the Owner, Contractor will furnish to the Owner, at cost, a Contract Bond covering the faithful performance of the Work free and clear of all liens arising out of claims for labor, material and/or equipment entering into the construction of the Project. This Bond shall require Contractor to indemnify and save harmless the Owner from all loss, cost and damage which the Owner may suffer by reason of Contractor' s failure to so perform. This Bond shall be in favor of the Owner and issued by a company approved by the Owner, which approval shall not be unreasonably withheld. This Bond shall not be valid if the payments required under the Contract are not made by the Owner in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Contract. Neither this subparagraph nor any other provision of the Contract imposes any duty upon Contractor to see to the payment of any mcnies to parties furnishing labor, material or equipment pursuant to a Ccntract with a subcontractor so long as title to all such labor, material and equipment incorporated into the Project passes to the Owner free and clear of liens, claims, security interests and other encumbrances. Contractor shall not be required to furnish any bonds covering such payments othE:r than the Contract Bond required hereunder. 7 . 6 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES 7 . 6. 1 The duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and the rights and remedies available thereunder shall be in addition to and not a limitation of any duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise imposed or available by law. 3323905 Clayco GENERAL CONDITIONS 0 Bee Credit Union 16 of 37 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm, Washington 07-16-13 7 . 6.2 No action or failure to act by the Owner or Contractor shall constitute a waiver of any right or duty afforded any of them under the Contract, nor shall any such action or failure to act constitute an approval of or acquiescence in any breach thereunder, except as may be specifically agreed in writing. 7 . 6.3 If any arbitration, litigation or other proceeding is commenced by either party hereunder, to enforce the obligations of the other party, then (a) the identity of the prevailing party in any such proceeding shall be determined by the arbitrator or court (whichever is applicable) , (b) such prevailing party shall be reimbursed by the non-prevailing party for all of the prevailing party' s reasonable out-of-pocket expenses incurred in connection therewith, including without limitation reasonable attorneys' fees and (c) the arbitrator or court (whichever is applicable) shall be authorized to make an award of such expense in any such proceeding. 7.7 TESTS 7.7. 1 If the Contract or any laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of any public authority having jurisdiction require any Work to be inspected, tested or approved by Building Inspector, Contractor shall give the Owner timely notice of its readiness and of the date arranged so they may observe such inspection, testing or approval. Contractor shall bear all costs of such inspections, tests and approvals unless otherwise provided. Should there be a requirement by any laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of any public authority having jurisdiction for special inspections by persons other than the Building Inspector, the Owner shall employ the services of a qualified special inspector who will provide selective or continuous inspection on the construction and work requiring its employment. 7 . 7 .2 If the Architect or the Owner determines that any Work requires special inspection, testing, or approval which Subparagraph 7 .7. 1 does not include, he will, upon written authorization from the Owner, instruct Contractor to order such special inspection, testing or approval, and Contractor shall give notice as provided in Subparagraph 7 . 7 . 1. If such special inspection or testing reveals a failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Coritract Documents, Contractor shall bear all costs thereof, including compensation for the Architect' s additional services made necessary by such failure; otherwise the Owner shall bear such costs, and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued. 7 . 7.3 Required certificates of inspection, testing or approval shall be secured by Contractor and promptly delivered by it to the Owner. 7 . 7. 4 If either the Architect or the Owner' s Construction Inspector wishes to observe the inspections, tests or approvals required by the Contract Documents, he will do so promptly and, where practicable, at the source of supply. 3323905 Clayco GENERAL CONDITIONS 0 Bee Credit Union � 17 of 37 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm, Washington 07-16-13 7 . 8 INTEREST 7. 8. 1 If the Owner fails to make payment in accordance with the terms of the Contract Documents, in addition to those remedies available to Contractor under Subparagraph 9. 7, there shall be added to such payment annual interest at a rate of 12%, which interest shall be compounded annually and annually added to, and bear the same interest as, the unpaid payment, but only to the extent allowed by law, which interest shall commence on the first day after said payment is due and continue until the payment with interest is received by Contractor. 7_9 (There is no Paragraph 7. 9. ) ARTICLE 8 TIME 8. 1 DEFINITION 8. 1.1 Unless otherwise provided, the Contract Time is the period of time allotted in the Contract Documents for Substantial Completion of the Work as defined in Subparagraph 8.1.3, including authorized adjustments thereto. 8 . 1 .2 The date of commencement of the Work shall be the date upon which all of the following have occurred: (1) execution of the Contract Documents; (2) issuance of all necessary permits for construction by the governing authorities; (3) completion of any demolition work by the Owner if such a requirement prior to the start of Contractor' s work under the Contract; and (4) submission of satisfactory evidence to Contractor from the Owner of completion of financing necessary to fund the Contract. 8. 1.3 The Date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof is the Date certified by the Architect when construction is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, so the Owner can occupy or utili�e the Work or designated portion thereof for the use for which it is intenda_d. If at any time the Owner occupies all or any portion of the Work, such ��ccupancy shall be an acknowledgement by Owner of substantial completion of. the occupied Work Area whether or not the Architect has issued a Certificate of Substantial Completion therefor or whether or not the Owner has accepted such Area. 8. 1.4 The term day <�s used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar day unless otherw�_se specifically designated. 8 .2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION 8 .2 . 1 All time limit:; stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. 8.2.2 Contractor shall begin the Work on the date of commencement as defined in Subparagraph 8.1.2 unless extended as provided elsewhere in the Contract Documents. It shall carry the Work forward expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract Time. 3323905 Clayco GENERAL CONDITIONS 0 Bee Credit Union 18 of 37 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm, Washington 07-16-13 8 .3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME 8. 3. 1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the commencement or progress of the Work by an act or neglect of the Owner, or of an employee of the Owner, or of a separate contractor employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the Work, or by labor disputes, fire, unusual delay in deliveries, the imposition of quotas or other restrictions on the ability of the Contractor to obtain material or equipment, unavoidable casualties or other causes not reasonably foreseeable on the date the Work commenced or which are beyond the Contractor' s control, adverse weather conditions or adverse site conditions caused by adverse weather which prevent construction activities of the type then scheduled, delays caused by governmental authorities fnot caused as a result of fault on the part of Contractor) or by delay authorized by the Owner pending mediation and arbitration, then the Contract Time shall be extended by Change Order for a reasonable time and the Contract Sum shall be adjusted to the extent reasonably necessary to compensate the Contractor for any increase in the Cost of the Work caused by such delay. 8 .3.2 Notices of delay shall be made in writing to the Owner no more than thirty (30) days after the occurrence of the cause of a delay and all claims for extension of time for performance of the contract shall be made in writing to the Owner no more than forty-five (45) days after the termination of the cause of the delay has ended; otherwise the claim for delay shall be waived. Ir� the case of a continuing cause of delay only one notice shall be required. 8 . 3.3 If no agreement is made stating the dates upon which interpretations as provided in Subparagraph 2.2. 8 shall be furnished, then no claim for delay shall k�e allowed on account of failure to furnish such interpretations until fifteen (15) days after written request is made for them, and not then unless such claim is reasonable. 8 .3. 4 This Paragraph 8. 3 does not exclude the recovery of damages for delay by either party unde�° other provisions of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 9. 1 CONTRACT SUM 9. 1.1 The Contract tiam is stated in the Agreement and, including authorized adjustments thei:eto, is the total amount payable by the Owner to Contractor for the performarice of the Work under the Contract Documents. 9.2 SCHEDULE OF VAL��ES 9.2 . 1 Before the second Application for Payment, Contractor shall submit to the Owner, a schedule of values of the various portions of the work, aggregating the Tota_� Contract. Each item in the schedule of values shall include its proper share of overhead and profit. This schedule, when and if approved by the Owner, shall be used only as a basis for Contractor' s Application for Payment. 3323905 Clayco GENERAL CONDITIONS 0 Bee Credit Union 19 of 37 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm, Washington 07-16-13 9. 3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 9. 3. 1 At least ten (10) days before the date for each progress payment established in the Agreement, Contractor shall submit to the Owner an itemized Application for Payment, reflecting retainage, if any, as provided elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 9.3.2 Payments shall be made on account of materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the Work. Payment may similarly be made for materials and equipment suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing. Payment for materials and equipment stored on or off the site shall be conditioned upon compliance by the Contractor with procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner' s title to such materials and equipment or otherwise protect the Owner' s interest, and shall include the costs of applicable insurance, storage and transportation to the site for such materials and equipment stored off the site. Except to the extent coverable by insurance pursuant to Section 11 . 4, the Contractor shall be liable for loss or damage to stored materials, whether stored on-site or off-site. 9. 3.3 Contractor warrants that title to all Work, materials and equipment covered by an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner either by incorporation in the construction or upon the receipt of payment by Contractor, whichever o�curs first, free and clear of all liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances, hereinafter referred to in this Article 9 as "liens"; and that no Work, materials or equipment covered by an Application for Payment will have been acquired by Contractor, or by any other person performing Work at the site or furnishing materials and equipment for the Project, subject to an agreement under which an interest therein or an encumbrance thereon is retained by the seller or otherwise imposed by Contractor or such other person. 9. 4 CERTIFICATES FGR PAYMENT 9. 4 . 1 The Owner will within seven days after receipt of the Contractor' s Application for Payment, either pay the amount of such Application for Payment to the Contractor, or notify the Contractor in writing of the Owner' s reasons for withholding payment in whole or in part. 9. 4 .2 The making of a Payment will constitute a representation by the Owner that the Work has progressed to the point indicated and that, to the best of the Owner' s knowledge, information and belief, the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents (subject to an evaluation of the Work for conformance with the Contract Documents upon Substantial Completion, to results of subsequent tests and inspections, to correction of minor deviations from the Contract documents prior to completion and to specific qualifications e�.pressed by the Owner) . The making of a Payment will further constitute a r�epresentation that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount set f-orth in the Application for Payment. 9. 5 PROGRESS PAYMENT 9. 5 . 1 After the Owner has issued a Certificate for Payment, the Owner shall make payment in the manner and within twenty (20) days or such shorter time as may be provided in the Contract Documents. 3323905 Clayco GENERAL CONDITIONS 0 Bee Credit Union 20 of 37 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm, Washington 07-16-13 9. 5.2 Contractor sha.:Ll promptly pay each Subcontractor, upon receipt of payment from the Owner, out of the amount paid to Contractor on account of such Subcontractor' s Work, the amount to which said Subcontractor is entitled reflecting the percentage to be retained, if any, in accordance with the terms of the Subcontract. Contractor shall, by an appropriate agreement with each Subc�ontractor, require each Subcontractor to make payments to its Sub-subcontractors in similar manner. 9. 5.3 (There is no Subparagraph 9. 5.3. ) 9. 5.4 The Owner shall. not have any obligation to pay or to see to the payment of any moneys to any Subcontractor except as may otherwise be required by law. 9. 5.5 No progress payment, nor any partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the Owner, shall constitute an acceptance of any Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9. 6 PAYMENTS WITHHELD 9. 6. 1 DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION If the Owner withholds a payment of all or any portion of an Application for Payment, then Owner wi.11 notify the Contractor. If the Contractor and the Owner cannot agree on a revised amount, the Owner will promptly pay the amount which is not in clispute. The Owner may withhold a Payment or, because of subsequently discovered evidence, may request a refund of the whole or a part of a Payment previously made to such extent as may be reasonably necessary to protect the Owner from loss for which the Contractor is responsible, resulting from acts and omission because of: . 1 defective Work not remedied; .2 third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable f:'iling of such claims unless security acceptable to the Owner is provided by the Contractor; . 3 failure cf the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or for labor, materials or equipment; . 4 reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaicl balance of the Contract Sum; . 5 damage to the Owner or other contractor; . 6 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time, and that the unpaid balance would not be adequate to cover actual or liquidated damages for the anticipated delay; or .7 persistent failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3323905 Clayco GENERAL CONDITIONS 0 Bee Credit Union 21 of 37 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm, Washington 07-16-13 9. 6.2 When the abovf=_ grounds in Subparagraph 9. 6. 1 are removed, payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of them. If the Contractor provides the Owner with a lien bond sufficient to cover mechanics' liens filed by the Contractor or any Subcontractor, the Owner shall not withhold paymer�t. The Contractor will diligently pursue the removal of any lien filed by a Subcontractor, and regardless of whether a lien bond is provided as set forth above, during such time the Owner shall not satisfy or pay off the lien or otherwise settle or compromise the Contractor' s claim; provic�ed, however, that promptly after a final, non- appealable judgment is rendered directing that the property be sold to satisfy the lien, and in any event prior to the date of such sale, the Contractor will satisfy the lien and pay the Contractor all amounts owing. 9. 7 PAYMENT AND FINANCING 9.7. 1 If the Owner should fail to pay Contractor within seven days after the date for payment, established in the Contract any amount certified by the Owner, then Contractor may, upon seven (7) additional days written notice to the Owner stop the Work until payment of the amount owing has been received. The Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of Contractor' s reasonable costs of shut-down, delay and start-up, which shall be effected by appropriate Change Order in accordance with Article 12 . 9. 7.2 If at any time, before or after commencement of the work, Contractor reasonably believes that the funding or financing of the Project is not sufficient or is in doubt, then Contractor may, upon seven (7) days written notice to the Owner, suspend its obligations under the contract until the Owner submits evidence satisfactory to Contractor that the financing or funding of the Project is sufficient. 9. 8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT 9. 8 . 1 When Contractor- determines that the Work, or a designated portion thereof which is acceptable to the Architect, is substantially complete as defined in Subparagraph 8 . 1.3, Contractor shall prepare for submission to the Owner a list of items to be completed or corrected. The failure to include any items on such list does not alter the responsibility of Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. When the Architect on the basis of an inspection determines that the Work is substantially complete, the Architect will then prepare a Certificate of Substantial. Completion which shall establish the Date of Substantial Completion, stiall state the responsibilities of the Owner and Contractor for maintenance, security, heating, cooling, utilities and insurance, and shall fix the time within which Contractor shall complete or correct the items listed therein. Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the earlier of the Date of Substantial Completion or occupancy or placing into service by the Owner of the Work or designated portion thereof, except for items on the list submitted to the Owner by Contractor, the warranty for these items shall commence on the date that the items are furnished or corrected by Contractor. The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be submitted to the Owner and Contractor for their written acceptance of the responsibilities assigned to them in such Certificate. Upon Substantial Completion of the Work or a designated portion thereof and upon application by Contractor and certification by the Owner, the Owner shall make payment, reflecting adjustment in retention, if any, for such work or portion thereof as 3323905 Clayco GENERAL CONDITIONS 0 Bee Credit Union 22 of 37 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm, Washington 07-16-13 provided in the Contract Documents. If at any time the Owner occupies or places into service all or any portion of the Work, such occupancy or placing into service shal.l be an acknowledgment by Owner of Substantial Completion of the Work so occupied or placed into service, Owner whether or not the Owner has accepted such Work. 9. 9 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT 9. 9. 1 Upon receipt of written notice from Contractor that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance and upon receipt of a final Application for Payment, the Owner will promptly make such inspection and, when he finds the Work acceptable under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully performed, he will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment stating that to the best of its knowledge, information and belief, and on the basis of its observations and inspections, the Work has been completed in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents and that the entire balance found to be due Contractor, and noted in said final Certificate, is due and payable. The Owner' s final Certificate for Payment will constitute a further representation that the conditions precedent to Contractor' s being entitled to final payment as set forth in Subparagraph 9. 9. 2 have been fulfilled. 9. 9.2 The final payment shall not become due until Contractor submits to the Owner (1) an affidavit that all payrolls, bills for materials and equipment, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or its property might in any way be responsible, and for which Contractor has been paid, have been paid or otherwise satisfied, (2) consent of surety, if any, to final payment and (3) , if required by the Owner, other data establishing payment or satisfaction of all such obligations, such as recei.pts, releases and waivers of liens arising out of the Contract, to the extent and in such form as may be designated by the Owner. If any Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the Owner, Contractor may furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify Owner against any such lien. If any such lien remains unsatisfied after all pay�ments are made, Contractor shall refund to the Owner all moneys that the latter may be compelled to pay in discharging such lien, including all costs and reasonable attorneys' fees. 9. 9.3 If, after Substantial Completion of the Work, final completion thereof is materially del.ayed through no fault of Contractor or by the issuance of Change Orders affecting final completion, the Owner shall, upon application by Contractol�, and without terminating the Contract, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remairiing balance for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than thF� retainage stipulated in the Contract Documents, and if bonds have been fu�: nished as provided in Paragraph 7 . 5, the written consent of the surety to the payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by Contractor to the Owner prior to certification of such payment. Such payment shall be made under the terms and c::>nditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a wai�,�er of claims. 9. 9. 4 The making of f..inal payment shall constitute a waiver of all claims by the Owner except those arising from: 3323905 Clayco GENERAL CONDITIONS 0 Bee Credit Union 23 of 37 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm, Washington 07-16-13 . 1 unsettled liens, .2 faulty c�� defective Work appearing after Substantial Completicn, . 3 failure of:� the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract L�ocuments, as amended and modified, . 4 terms of any special warranties required by the Contract Documents . 9. 9. 5 The acceptance of final payment shall constitute a waiver of all claims by Contractor, subcontractors or material suppliers, except those previously made in writing and identified by Contractor as unsettled at the time of the final payment. ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10. 1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS 10. 1. 1 Contractor shal.l be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety pr..ecautions and programs in connection with the Work. 10.2 SAFETY OF PERSCPIS AND PROPERTY 10.2. 1 Contractor sha1.1 take all reasonable precautions for the safety of, and shall provide all reasonable protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: . 1 employees on the Work and all other persons who may be affected thereby, .2 the Work and all materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site, under the care, custody or control of Contractor or any of its Subcontractors or Sub-subcontractors; and . 3 other property at the site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures and utilities not designated for removal, relocatioz-� or replacement in the course of construction. 10 .2.2 Contractor shal:. give all notices and comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders of any public authority bearing on the s,afety of persons or property or their protection from damage, injury or los:;. 3323905 Clayco GENERAL CONDITIONS 0 Bee Credit Union 24 of 37 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm, Washington 07-16-13 10.2.3 Contractor shal.l erect and maintain, as required by existing conditions and progress of the Work, all reasonable safeguards for safety and protection, including posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards, promulgating safety regulations and notifying owners and users of adjacent utilities. 10.2. 4 When the use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment is necessary for the execution of the Work, Contractor shall exercise the utmost care and shall carry on such activities under the supervision of properly qualified personnel. 10.2.5 Contractor shall promptly remedy all damage or loss (other than damage or loss insured under Paragraph 11 .3) to any property referred to in Clauses 10.2. 1.2 and 10.2 . 1. 3 caused in whole or in part by Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Sub-subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable and for which Contractor is responsible under Clauses 10.2. 1.2 and 10.2. 1. 3, except damage or loss attributable to the acts or omissions of the Owner or anyone directly or indirectly employed by the Owner, or by anyone for whose acts the Owner may be liable, and not attributable to the fault or negligence of Cor�tractor. The foregoing obligations of Contractor are in addition to its ob�igations under Paragraph 4 . 18. 10.2 . 6 Contractor shall designate a responsible member of its organization at the site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents. This person shall be Contractor' s superintendent unless otherwise designated by Contractor in writing to the Owner. 10.2.7 Contractor sha1.1 not load or permit any part of the Work to be loaded so as to endanger its safety. 10.2. 8 The Owner is cornmitted to provided a safe working environment on the jobsite. In endeavoring to achieve a safe workplace, the Owner requires that the Contractor implement a substance abuse policy covering all Contractor, Subcontrac:tor, and Sub-subcontractor employees of any tier throughout the duration ��f this Project. Contractor agrees that such policy shall be in accor�iance with the Contractor' s corporate substance abuse policy. 10. 3 EMERGENCIES 10. 3. 1 In any emergency affecting the safety of persons or property, Contractor shall act, at its discretion, to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss. Any addit::ional compensation or extension of time claimed by Contractor on account c:�f emergency work shall be determined as provided in Article 12 for Changes i.n the Work. 10.3.2 If, without nE�gligence on the part of the Contractor, the Contractor is held liabl=� for the cost of remediation of a hazardous material or substance sole�ly by reason of performing Work as required by the Contract Documents, t:��e Owner shall indemnify the Contractor for all cost and expense thereby i:�curred. 3323905 Clayco GENERAL CONDITIONS 0 Bee Credit Union 25 of 37 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm, Washington 07-16-13 ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE 11. 1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE 11 . 1. 1 Contractor shall purchase and maintain such insurance as will protect Contractor from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from Contractor' s operations under the Contract, whether such operations be by itself or by Subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable: . 1 claims under workers' or workmen' s compensation, disability benefit and other similar employee benefit acts; .2 claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of its employees; . 3 claims for. damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, cr death of any person other than its employees; . 4 claims for damages insured by usual personal injury liability coverage which are sustained (1) by any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to the em�>loyment of such person by Contractor, or (2) by any other person; . 5 claims fo� damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injur}� to or destruction of tangible property, including loss of use resulting therefrom; and . 6 claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property . damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle. 11 . 1.2 The insurance required by Subparagraph 11. 1. 1 shall be written for not less than any limits of liability specified in the Contract Documents, or required by ]_aw, whichever is greater. 11. 1.3 The insurance required by Subparagraph 11. 1 . 1 shall include contractual liability in;=urance applicable to Contractor's obligations under Paragraph 4 . 18 . 1. 11. 1. 4 Certificates of Insurance reflecting the coverages Contractor is required to provide under the Contract Documents shall be filed with the Owner prior to execution oi the Contract. These Certificates shall contain a provision that coverages afforded under the policies will not be cancelled until at least thirty (30) days prior written notice has been given to the Owner. 11.2 OWNER' S LIABILITY INSURANCE 3323905 Clayco GENERAL CONDITIONS 0 Bee Credit Union 26 of 37 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm, Washington 07-16-13 11 .2. 1 The Owner sha.11 be responsible for purchasing and maintaining its own liability insurarice and, at its option, may purchase and maintain such insurance as will p�otect Owner against claims which may arise from operations under the Contz°act. 11.3 PROPERTY INSURnNCE 11.3. 1 The Owner shall purchase and maintain, in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located, property insurance written on a builder' s risk "all-risk" or equivalent policy form in the amount of the value of the Work then completed by Contractor and cost of materials supplied or installed by others, comprising the then total value for the entire Project at the site on a replacement cost basis. Such property insurance shall be maintained at all times for the duration of the Project, and shall name Contractor and all tiered subcontractors as additional insureds, or; unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or otherwise agreed in writing by all persons and entities who are beneficiaries of such insurance, until final payment has been made as provided in Section 9. 9 or until no person or entity other than the Owner has an insurable interest in the property required by this Section 11. 4 to be covered, whichever is later. This insurance shall include interests of the Owner, the Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Project, and current evidence of such insurance shall be furnished to the Contractor on request. 11 .3. 1.2 Property insurance shall be on an "all-risk" or equivalent policy form and shall include insurance against the perils of fire (with extended coverage) and physical lc�ss or damage including, without duplication of coverage, theft, vandalism, malicious mischief, collapse, earthquake, flood, windstorm, falsewoz:k, testing and startup, temporary buildings and debris removal including demolition occasioned by enforcement of any applicable legal requirements, and shall cover reasonable compensation for Architect' s and Contractor ' s services and expenses required as a result of such insured loss. The Owner shall provide the required Certificate (s) of Insurance to the Contractor prior to commencement of the Work. A copy of the Policy(ies) will only be provided upon specific request. 11 . 3. 1.3 If the property insurance requires deductibles, the Owner shall pay such applicable deductible. 11. 3. 1. 4 This property insurance shall cover portions of the Work stored off the site, and also portions of the Work in transit. 11 . 3.2 The Owner shall purchase and maintain such boiler and machinery insurance as may be required by the Contract Documents or by law. This insurance shall include the interests of the Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subc.:ontractors in the Work. 3323905 Clayco GENERAL CONDITIONS 0 Bee Credit Union 27 of 37 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm, Washington 07-16-13 11. 3. 3 Any loss insured under Subparagraph 11.3. 1 is to be adjusted with the Owner and made payable to the Owner as trustee for the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to the requirements of any applicable mortgagee clause as approved by Contractor and of Subparagraph 11. 3. 8. Contractor shall pay each Subcontractor a just share of any insurance moneys received by Contractor and by appropriate agreement, written where legally required for validity, shall require each Subcontractor to make payments to its Sub-subcontractors in similar manner. 11. 3. 4 The Owner shall file a copy of all policies with Contractor before any exposure to loss may occur. If the Owner does not intend to purchase such insurance or any specific coverage required therein, Owner shall notify Contractor in writing prior to the commencement of the Work. In the event of receipt of such written notice, Contractor may then effect insurance coverage not purchased by the Owner which will protect Contractor' s interest, its subcontractors and its sub-subcontractors in the Work, and by appropriate Change Order, the cost thereof shall be charged to the Owner. If Contractor is damaged by the Owner' s failure to obtain or maintain the complete insurance coverage required, then the Owner shall be responsible for all costs and damages resulting therefrom which would have otherwise been insured had the Owner obtained the coverage required. 11. 3. 5 If Contractor requests in writing that insurance for risks other than those described in Subparagraphs 11 . 3. 1 and 11.3. 2 or other specific hazards be included in the property insurance policy, the Owner shall, include such insurance, ar.d pay the cost thereof. 11. 3. 6 The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against (1) each other and the Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, agents and employees each of the other, and (2) separate Contractors, if any, and their subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents and employees, for damages caused by fire or other perils to the extent covered by insurance obtained pursuant to this Paragraph 11. 3 or any otner property insurance applicable to the Work, except such rights as they may have to the proceeds of such insurance held by the Owner as trustee. The Owner or Contractor, as appropriate, shall require of, separate Contractors, subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, similar waivers each in favor of all other parties enumerated herein. The policies shall provide such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. A waiver of �ubrogation shall be effective as to a person or entity even though that �>erson or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnification, contractual or otherwise, did not pay the insurance premium directly or indirectly, and whether or not the person or entity had an insurable interest in trie property damaged. 11. 3.7 If required in writing by any party in interest, the Owner as trustee shall, upon the cccurrence of an insured loss, give bond for the proper performance of its duties. He shall deposit in a separate account any money so received, anc� he shall distribute it in accordance with such agreement as the parties i.n interest may reach. If, after such loss, no other special agreement i.s made, replacement of damaged work shall be covered by an appropriate �'hange Order. 3323905 Clayco GENERAL CONDITIONS 0 Bee Credit Union 28 of 37 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm, Washington 07-16-13 11.3.8 The Owner as trustee shall have power to adjust and settle any loss with the insurers unless or,e of the parties in interest shall object in writing within five days after the occurrence of loss to the Owner's exercise of this power. The Owner as trustee shall, in that case, make settlement with the insurers in accordance with the agreement of the parties. 11. 3. 9 If the Owner finds it necessary to occupy or use a portion or portions of the Work prior to Substantial Completion thereof, such occupancy shall not commence prior to a time mutually agreed to by the Owner and Contractor and to which the insurance company or companies providing the property insurance have consented by endorsement to the policy or policies. This insurance shall not be cancelled or lapsed on account of such partial occupancy. Consent of Contractor and of the insurance company or companies to such occupancy or use shall not be unreasonably withheld. 11.3. 10 If during the Project construction period the Owner insures properties, real or personal or both, at or adjacent to the site by property insurance under policies separate from those insuring the Project, or if after final payment property insurance is to be provided on the completed Project through a policy or policies other than those insuring the Project during the construction period, the Owner shall waive all rights for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss covered by this separate property insurarice. Al1 separate policies shall provide this waiver of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. 11 . 4 LOSS OF USE INSURANCE 11. 4. 1 The Owner sha-�l purchase and maintain such insurance as is necessary to insure Owner against loss of use of Owner' s property due to fire or other hazards, hocaever caused. The Owner hereby waives all rights of action against Contractor for loss of use of Owner' s property, including consequential damages due to fire or other hazards however caused. ARTICLE 12 CHANGES IN THE WORK 12. 1 CHANGE ORDERS 12 . 1. 1 A Change Order is a written order to Contractor signed by Contractor and Owner, i.ssued after the execution of the Contract, authorizing a Change in ttie Work or an adjustment in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. The C��ntract Sum and the Contract Time may be changed only by Change Order. 12 . 1.2 The Owner, wit:hout invalidating the Contract, may request Changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions, deletions or otizer revisions, the Contract Sum and the Contract Time being adjusted accordingly. All such Changes in the Work shall be authorized by Change Order, and shall be executed under the applicable conditions of the Contract . If any such Change in the Work requires design services by Architect and Structural Engineer, or if any proposed Change in the Work is initiated or requested by the Owner and requires design 3323905 Clayco GENERAL CONDITIONS 0 Bee Credit Union 29 of 37 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm, Washington 07-16-13 services by Architect, whether or not such proposed Change results in a Change in the Work, the Owner shall compensate the Architect and Structural Engineer for such services, such compensation to be in addition to that specified in the Agreement of this Contract. 12 . 1. 3 The cost or credit to the Owner resulting from a change in the Work shall be determined in one or more of the following ways: . 1 by mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized; .2 by unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon; . 3 if the Owner and Contractor cannot agree on any of the above, then the method provided in subparagraph 12 . 1 . 4 shall be followed. 12 . 1. 4 If none of the methods set forth in Clauses 12. 1. 3.1 or 12 . 1.3.2 is agreed upon, Contractor, provided it receives a written order signed by the Owner and the Architect, shall promptly proceed with the Work involved. The cost of such Work shall then be determined Contractor and approved by the Owner on the basis of the reason-able expenditures and savings of those performing the Work attributable to the Change, including, in the case of an increase in the Contract Sum, the following: . l for subcontractors, the increase shall be based upon the cost of labor (including Social Security, insurance and welfare contributions) , materials, equipment rentals, and there shall be added to these costs a fixed fee of fifteen percent (150) . This fixed fee shall be full compensation to cover the cost of supervision (job and office) , all overhead, bond, profit and any other expenses, including all costs resulting from additional time, if any, required to complete the Subcontract. .2 for Contractor, the increase shall be based upon the cost of the following items. . i the �:ost of all materials required by the change; .ii the cost of all labor required by the change (incl.uding all fringes, payroll taxes and insurance) ; .iii the ��ost of all equipment rentals; .iv the �ost of all portions of the Work performed by subc��ntractors; .v the cost of field overhead attributable to this chance; .vi a fixed fee of 15 0 of the total of items I, ii, iii, iv arid v above, which shall be the compensation to CONTRACTOR to cover the cost of hand tools, home office overhead, other expenses and profit; and, 3323905 Clayco GENERAL CONDITIONS 0 Bee Credit Union 30 of 37 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm, Washington 07-16-13 .vii the cost of Architectural and Engineering services, if zequired, resulting from this change per Paragraph 12 . 1 .2 . In such case, Contractor shall keep and present an itemized accounting together with appropriate supporting data, for inclusion in a Change Order. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, cost shall be limited to the following: Cost of materials, including sales tax and cost of delivery; cost of labor, including Social Security, old age and unemployment insurance, and fringe benefits required by agreement or custom; Workers' or Workmen' s Compensation insurance; bond premiums; rental value of equipment and machinery; and the additional costs of supervision and field office personnel directly attributable to the change. Pending final determination of cost to the Owner, payments on account shall be made on the Application of Payment. The amount of credit to be allowed by Contractor to the Owner for any deletion or change which results in a net decrease in the Contract Sum will be the amount of the actual net cost as confirmed by the Owner. When both additions and credits covering related Work or substitutions are involved in any one change, the allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured on the basis of the net increase, if any, with respect to that change. 12 . 1. 5 If unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon, and if the quantities originally contemplated are so changed in a proposed Change Order that application of the agreed unit prices to the quantities of Work proposed will cause substantial inequity to the Owner or CONTRACTOR, the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted. 12 .2 CONCEALED CONDITIONS 12.2.1 Claims for Concealed or Unknown Conditions. If conditions are encountered at the site which are (1) subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions which differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents or (2) unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature, which differ materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the Contract Documents, then notice by the observing party shall be given to the other party promptly before conditions are disturbed and in no event later than 21 days after first observance of the conditions. If the conditions encountered are materially different, the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be eqtiitably adjusted, but if the Owner and Contractor cannot agree on an adjust:nent in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, the matter shall be considerecl a Claim and be resolved in accordance with this Agreement. 12 .2.2 The Owner and Contractor acknowledge and agree that while asbestos may be present in the existing structure, if any, the Contract Documents do not require Contractor to identify or remove any asbestos unless a Modification to the Contract is agreed to by the Owner, Contractor. 12 . 3 CLAIMS FOR ADDITIONAL COST 12 . 3. 1 Any claim for an increase in the Contract Sum shall be made in writing to the Owner within forty-five (45) days after the occurrence of the 3323905 Clayco GENERAL CONDITIONS 0 Bee Credit Union 31 of 37 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm, Washington 07-16-13 event giving rise to sucL claim except where the event for which the claim is made is delay, then within forty-five (45) days of the event ending the delay. Such notice of claim shall be given before proceeding to execute the Work, except (1) in an emergency endangering life or property, in which case the Work shall proceed in accordance with Subparagraph 10.3. 1, or (2) in the case of a claim for delay which is cause for the Contract Time to be extended pursuant to Subparagraph 8. 3. 1. No claim shall be valid unless the notice provided herein is given. Any increases in the Contract Sum resulting from a claim ma�e in accordance with this paragraph shall be made by written Change Order. 12 . 3.2 Any claim for additional costs because of (1) any interpretation issued pursuant to Subparagraph 2.2. 8; (2) any order by the Owner to stop work pursuant to Paragraph 3.3; (3) any written order for a minor change in the work issued pursuant to Paragraph 12. 4; or (4) any delay which is cause for the Contract Time to be extended pursuant to Subparagraph 8. 3. 1; shall be made in accordance with Subparagraph 12 .3. 1. 12 . 4 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK 12. 4 . 1 The Architect will have authority to order minor changes in the Work not involving an adjustment in the Contract Sum or an extension of the Contract Time and not inconsistent with the intent of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 13 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION (>F WORK 13. 1 UNCOVERING OF WORK 13. 1. 1 If any portion of the Work should be covered contrary to the request of the Owner' � Construction Inspector or to requirements specifically expressed in the Contract Documents, it must, if required in writing by either party, be uncovered for its observation and shall be replaced at Contractor' s expense. 13. 1.2 If any other Work has been covered which the Owner' s Construction Inspector has not specifically requested to observe prior to being covered, the Owner' s Construction Inspector may request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by Contractor. If such Work be found in substantial conformance wit:h the Contract Documents, the cost of uncovering and replacement shall, by appropriate Change Order, be charged to the Owner. If such Work be found not in substantial conformance with the Contract Documents, Contrac;tor shall pay such costs unless it be found that this condition was caused ]�y a separate Contractor employed as provided in Article 6, and in that everit the Owner shall be responsible for the payment of such costs. 13.2 Correction of Work 13.2. 1 Contractor shall promptly correct all Work rejected as failing to substantially conform to the Contract Documents that is observed before Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or 3323905 Clayco GENERAL CONDITIONS 0 Bee Credit Union 32 of 37 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm, Washington 07-16-13 completed. Contractor shall bear all costs of correcting such rejected Work. 13.2.2 If, within one year after the Date of Substantial Completion or within such longer period of time as may be prescribed by law or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to be defective or not in substantial conformance with the Contract, Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of a written not��ce from the Owner to do so unless the Owner has previously given Contractor a written acceptance of such Work. The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the defect or substantial nonconformance. During the one-year period for correction of Work, if the Owner fails to notify the Contractor and give the Contractor an opportunity to make the correction, the Owner waives the rights to require correction by the Contractor. 13.2.3 Al1 such defective or substantially non-conforming Work under Subparagraphs 13.2. 1 and 13.2 .2 shall be removed from the site if necessary, and the Work shall be corrected to comply with the Contract without cost to the Owner. 13.2 . 4 Contractor shall bear the cost of making good all work of separate Contractors destroyed or damaged by such removal or correction. 13.2.5 If Contractor does not remove such defective or substantially non-conforming Work within a reasonable time fixed by written notice from the Owner, the Owner may remove it and may store the materials or equipment at the expense of Contractor. If Contractor does not pay the cost of such removal and storage within ten days thereafter, the Owner may upon ten (10) additional days written notice sell such Work at auction or at private sale and shall account for the net proceeds thereof, after deducting all the costs that should have been borne by Contractor, including compensation for additional architectural services. If such proceeds of sale do not cover all costs which Contractor should have borne, the difference shall be charged to Contractor and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued. If the payments then or thereafter due Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amount, Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. 13.2. 6 If Contractor fails to correct such defective or substantially non-conforming Work, the Owner may correct it in accordance with Paragraph 3. 4 . 13.2. 7 Nothing contained in this Paragraph 13.2 shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to any other obligation which Contractor might have under the Contract Documents, including Paragraph 4 . 5 hereof. The establishment of the time period of one year after the Date of Substantial Completion or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by law or by the terms of any warranty required by the Contract Documents relates only to the specif'ic obligation of Contractor to correct the Work, and has no relationship to the time within which its obligation to comply with the Contract Document.s may be sought to be enforced, nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish Contractor' s liability with respect to its obligations other than specifically to correct the Work. 3323905 Clayco GENERAL CONDITIONS 0 Bee Credit Union 33 of 37 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm, Washington 07-16-13 13.3 ACCEPTANCE OF L)EFECTIVE OR NON-CONFORMING WORK 13. 3. 1 If the Owner prefers to accept defective or non-conforming Work, he may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction, in which case a Change Order will be issued to reflect a reduction in the Contract Sum where appropriate and equitable. Such adjustment shall be effected whether or not final payment has been made. ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OF CONTRACT 14. 1 TERMINATION BY CONTRACTOR 14 . 1. 1 If the Work is stopped for a period of thirty (30) days under an order of any court or other public authority claiming jurisdiction, or as a result of an act of government, such as declaration of national emergency making materials unavailable, through no act or fault of Contractor or a subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons performing any of the Work under a contract with Contractor or if the Work should be stopped for a period of thirty (30) days by Contractor for the Owner' s failure to make payment as provided in Paragraph 9.7. 1, or if the Contract shall be suspended for thirty (30) days for the Owner' s failure to provide satisfactory evidence of financing or funding as provided in Subparagraph 9.7.2, then Contractor may, upon seven (7) days written notice to the Owner, terminate the contract and recover from the Owner payment for all Work executed and for any proven loss sustained upon any materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery including reasonable profit, overhead and damages, including without limitation, overhead and profit on the Work not executed. 14 .2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER 14 .2 . 1 If Contractor is adjudged a bankrupt, or if it makes a general assignment for the benefit of its creditors, or if a receiver is appointed on account of its insolvency, or if it persistently or repeatedly refuses or fails, except in cases for which extension of time is provided, to supply enough properly skilled workmen or proper materials, or if it fails to make prompt payment t�� Subcontractors or for materials or labor, or persistently disregards laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of any public authority having jurisdiction, or otherwise is guilty of a substantial violation of a provision of the Contract Documents, then the Owner, upon certificatio�; by the Owner' s Construction Inspector that sufficient cause exists to justify such action, may, without prejudice to any right or remedy and after giving Contractor and its surety, if any, seven (7) days written not.ice, terminate the employment of Contractor and take possession of the :site and of all materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment an�� machinery thereon owned by Contractor and may finish the Work by whatecer method he may deem expedient. In such case Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is finished. 14 .2 .2 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds the costs of finishing the Work, such excess shall be paid to Contractor. If such costs exceed the unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the difference to the 3323905 Clayco GENERAL CONDITIONS 0 Bee Credit Union 34 of 37 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm, Washington 07-16-13 Owner. The amount to be paid to Contractor or to the Owner, as the case may be, in the manner pr:>vided in Paragraph 9. 4, and this obligation for payment shall survive the termination of the Contract. ARTICLE 15 RESOLUTION OF CLAIMS 15 . 1 MECHANIC' S LIENS If a Claim relates to or is the subject of a mechanic' s lien, the party asserting such Claim may proceed in accordance with applicable law to comply with the lien notice or filing deadlines prior to resolution of the Claim, by mediation or by arbitration. 15.2 MEDIATION 15.2. 1 Any Claim arising out of or related to the Contract, except those waived and barred elsewhere in the Contract as shall be subject to mediation as a condition precedent to arbitration or the institution of legal or equitable proceedings by either party. 15.2 .2 The parties shall endeavor to resolve their Claims by mediation in good faith, which, unless the parties mutually agree otherwise, shall be in accordance with the Construction Industry Mediation Rules of the American Arbitration Association. If the parties cannot agree upon a mediator, the parties will apply to either the American Arbitration Association for appointrr�ent of a mediator in accordance with that organization' s rules . Requests for mediation shall be in writing with the other party. The request may be made concurrently with the filing of a demand for arbitration bat, in such event, mediation shall proceed in advance of arbitration or legal or equitable proceedings, which shall be stayed pending mediation for a period of 120 days from the date of filing, unless stayed for a longer period by agreement of the parties or court order. 15 .2. 3 The parties srall share equally the mediator' s fee and any filing fees. The mediation shall be held in St. Louis County, Missouri, unless another location is mutually agreed upon. Agreements reached in mediation shall be enforceable as settlement agreements in any court having jurisdiction thereof. 15.3 ARBITRATION 15 . 3. 1 Any controversy or Claim arising out of or related to the Contract, or the breach thereof, except those waived and barred elsewhere in the Contract, which are not resolved by mediation, shall be settled by binding arbitration and judgment upon the award rendered by the arbitrator or arbitrators may be enter�ed in any court having jurisdiction thereof. The arbitration shall be held within St. Louis County, Missouri, unless another location is mutually agreed upon. Prior to arbitration, the parties shall endeavor to resolve disputes by mediation in accordance with the provisions of Article 15. 3323905 Clayco GENERAL CONDITIONS 0 Bee Credit Union 35 of 37 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm, Washington 07-16-13 15.3.2 Claims not resc�lved by mediation shall be decided by arbitration which, unless the partie� mutually agree otherwise, shall be in accordance with the Construction Industry Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association currently in effect. The demand for arbitration shall be filed in writing with the other party to the Contract and with the American Arbitration Association, and a copy shall be filed with the Architect. 15. 3.3 A demand for arbitration shall be made within a reasonable time after the Claim has arisen, and in no event shall it be made after the date when institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on such Claim would be barred by the applicable statute of limitations. 15.3. 4 Either party may demand production of documents from the other in advance of the arbitration and the party from whom the documents are requested shall produce t_�e documents requested within thirty (30) days of the request, or such other date as the parties may agree. Other discovery may be permitted in the discretion of the arbitrator, upon a showing of good cause. All disputes regarding discovery shall be decided by the arbitrator. The arbitration award shall be made under and in accordance with the laws of the State of , supported by substantial evidence, and shall be in writing. The foregoing agreement to arbitrate and other agreements to arbitrate with an additional person or entity duly consented to by parties to the Agreement shall be specifically enforceable under applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof. 15 .3. 5 Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims. The party filing a notice of demand for arbitration must assert in the demand all Claims then known to that party on whi��h arbitration is permitted to be demanded. 15. 3. 6 Judgment on Final Award. The award rendered by the arbitrator or arbitrators shall be final, and judgment may be entered upon it in accordance with applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof. ARTICLE 16 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS 16. 1 HAZARDOUS MATER.IALS 16. 1. 1 If reasonable precautions will be inadequate to prevent foreseeable bodily injury or death to persons resulting from a material or substance, including bu� not limited to asbestos, lead paint or polychlorinated biphenyl iPCB) , encountered on the site by the Contractor, the Contractor shall, upon recognizing the condition, immediately stop Work in the affected area and ieport the condition to the Owner in writing. If Contractor discovers any unknown or previously undiscovered or undisclosed potentially hazardous or toxic materials, he shall, upon recognizing the condition, immediately stop Work in the affected area and report the condition to the Owner in writing. 16. 1.2 The Owner shall obtain the services of a licensed laboratory to verify the presence or absence of the material or substance reported by the Contractor and, in the event such material or substance is found to be 3323905 Clayco GENERAL CONDITIONS 0 Bee Credit Union 36 of 37 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm, Washington 07-16-13 present, to verify that it has been rendered harmless. Unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall furnish in writing to the Contractor the names and qualifications of persons or entities who are to perform tests verifying the presence or absence of such material or substance or who are to perform the task of removal or safe containment of such material or substance. The Contractor will promptly reply to the Owner in writing stating whether or not either has reasonable objection to the persons or entities proposed by the Owner. If the Contractor has an objection to a person oi- entity proposed by the Owner, the Owner shall propose another to whom the Contractor has no reasonable objection. When the material or substance has been rendered harmless, Work in the affected area shall resume upon written agreement of the Owner and Contractor. The Contract Time shall be ex*.ended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased in the amount cf the Contractor' s reasonable additional costs of shut-down, delay and start-up, which adjustments shall be accomplished as provided in Article 12. 16. 1.3 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor, Subcontractors, Architect, Architect' s consultants and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys ' fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work in the affected area if in fact the material or substance presents the risk of bodily injury or death as described in Section 10. 3. 1, the material or substance was present on the project site prior to Contractor commencing work, and the material or substance has not been rendered harmless, provided that such claim, damage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself) but only to the extent that such damage, loss or ex�:ense is not due to the negligence of a party seeking indemnity. 16. 1. 4 The Owner shall not be responsible under Section 10. 3 for materials and substances �rought to the site by the Contractor unless such materials or substances were required by the Contract Documents. END OF GENERAL CONDITIONS 3323905 Clayco GENERAL CONDITIONS 0 Bee Credit Union 37 of 37 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 SECTION 024119- SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: � 1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach iteins from existing constru�:tion and legally dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and accep��ance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility licensed to accept hazardous wastes. 1.4 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. B. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous inaterials will be encountered in the Work. l. If suspected hazardous inaterials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract. C. Storage or sale of removed items or materials o:n-site is not pennitted. D. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities in�dicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective deinolition,by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 02070- 1 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 PART2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations. B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. C. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural eleinents that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect. 3.2 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION,GENERAL A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within liinitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Neatly cut openings and holes pluinb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding,not haimnering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 3.3 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. General: Remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill. 1. Do not allow deinolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 02070 -2 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. END OF SECTION 024119 SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 02070- 3 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 SECTION 03300-CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Extent of cast-in-place concrete work is shown on drawings. Refer to all drawings, room finish sechedules,details and specifications for kind type and location of concrete work required. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit data for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and forming accessories, admixtures, patching c�ompounds, waterstops, joint systems, curing compounds,dry-shake finish materials, and others as requested by Architect/Contractor. B. Shop Drawings; Reinforcement: Subinit original shop drawings prepared by registered Professional Engineer for fabrication, bending, and placeinent of concrete reinforcement. Comply with ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures". C. Laboratory Test Reports: Submit laboratory test reports for concrete materials and mix design test as specified. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Coinply with provisions �of following codes, specifications and standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified: 1. ACI 301 "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings". 2. ACI 318 "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete". 3. ACI 304 "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete. 4. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute(CRSI), "Manual of Standard Practice". B. Materials and installed work inay require testing and retesting at anytime during progress of work. Tests, including retesting of rejected inaterials for installed work, shall be done at Sub- Contractar's expense. C. Workmanship: The Sub-Contractor is responsible for correction of concrete work which does not confonn to specified requirements, including strength tolerances, and finishes. Correct deficient concrete as directed by Contractor and Architect. l.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protect adjacent finish materials against spatter during concrete placement. SECTION 03300-CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE Page 1 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 REINFORCING MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, with Supplementary Requirements (S 1), Grade 60, defonned, unless noted otherwise. B. Steel Wire: ASTM A 82. C. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185. D. Supports for Reinforcement: Bolsters, chairs, spacers and other devices for spacing, supporting and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use wire bar type supports complying with CRSI recominendations. 22 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. B. Nonnal Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, and as herein specified. Provide aggregates from a single source. C. Water: Drinkable. D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other required admixtures. E. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A, and contain not inore than 0.1 percent chloride ions. F. Water-Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D, and contain not more than 0.1 percent chloride ions. G. Certification: Provide admixture manufacturer's written certification that chloride ion content complies with specified requirements. H. Calcium chloride or admixtures containing more than 0.1 percent chloride ions are not permitted. 2.3 RELATED MATERIALS A. Vapor Retarder: Provide vapor retarder cover over prepared base material where indicated below slabs on grade. Use only materials which are resistant to decay when tested in accordance with ASTM E 154, as follows: 1. Polyethyelene sheet not less than 10 inils thick. B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: One of the following,complying with ASTM C 171. 1. Waterproof paper. SECTION 03300-CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE Page 2 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,W ashington 07-16-13 2. Polyethylene film. 3. Polyethylene-coated burlap. C. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A. � D. Bonding Compound: Polyvinyl acetate or acrylic base,rewettable type. E. Epoxy Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two compor►ent material suitable for use on dry or damp surfaces. Provide material "Type", "Grade", and"Class" to suit project requirements. F. Joint Fillers: Provide resilient, non-extruding ry�pe preinolded wood fiber board units complying with ASTM D 1751,ASTM D 2828, Class HHF 341e,Type 1. l. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Homex 300"; Homosote Co. G. Liquid Joint Fillers: Semi-rigid epoxy with a cured hardness of Shore A-80, tensile strength of approximately 400 to 500 psi, adhesion to concrete of approximately 180 to 230 psi and 100 perdcent solids. Color shall be medium gray. l. Manufacturers: MM-80 manufactured by Metzger/McGuire or Dynaflex 502 manufactured by Nox-Crete,Inc H. Non- shrink Non-Metallic G•out: Compression strength (28 Days) Miniinum 8,000 psi 2.4 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES A. Prepare design inixes for each type and strength of concrete by laboratory trial batch method as specified in ACI 301. Use an independent testing facility acceptable to Owner and Architect for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. 'The testing facility shall not be the same as used for field quality control testing,unless acceptable to Owner and Architect. B. Submit written reports to Contractor and Architect and Structural Engineer of each proposed inix for each class of concrete at least 15 days prior to start of work. Do not begin concrete production until mixes have been reviewed by contractar and Architect. C. Design mixes to provide normal weight concrete with the following properties, as indicated on drawings and schedules: 1. Use air-entraining adinixture in founciations pennanently exposed, providing 4-l/2 percent to 7 percent for concrete specified. 2. Include waterproof admix in design for exterior curbs,walks and paving. 3. Refer to Structural Drawings Sheet S 1.1 for Compressive strength requirements. D. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by Sub- Contractor when characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant; at no additional cost to contractor and as accepted by contractor/ Architect. Laboratory SECTION 03300-CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE Page 3 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 test data for revised mix design and strength results must be submitted to and accepted by contractor and contractor/Architect before using in work.. E. Admixtures: 1. Use water-reducing admixture in concrete as required for placement and workability. 2. Use non-chloride accelerating admixture in concrete slabs placed at ambient temperatures below 50 deg.F. Those containing chloride are not permitted. 3. Use air-entraining admixtures in exterior exposed concrete, unless otherwise indicated. Add air-entraining adinixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having total air content of 4-1/2 percent to 7 percent. 4. Use admixtures for water-reducing and set-control in strict compliance with manufacturer's directions. F. Slump Limits: Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at point of placeinent as follows: 1. Reinforced foundation systems: Not less than 2 inches and not more than 4 inches. 2. Other concrete:Not more than 5 inches. 2.5 CONCRETE MIXES A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure,batch,inix,and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94, and furnish batch ticket infonnation. PART3 -EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Coordinate the installation of joint materials and vapor retarders with placeinent of forms and reinforcing steel. 3.2 VAPOR RETARDER INSTALLATION A. Following leveling and tamping of granular base for slabs on grade,place vapor retarder sheeting with longest dimension parallel with direction ofpour. B. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with appropriate tape. SECTION 03300- CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE Page 4 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 3.3 PLACING REINFORCEMENT A. Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for "Placing Reinforcing Bars", for details and inethods of reinforcement placement and supports, and as herein specified. l. Avoid cutting or puncturing vapor �retarder during reinforcement placement and concreting operations. B. Install welded wire fabric in as long lengths as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh and lace splices with��ire. 3.4 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. General: Comply with ACl 304,and as herein specified. B. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be placed on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness. lf a section cannot be placed continuously, ��rovide construction joints as herein specified. Deposit concrete as nearly as practicable to its final location to avoid segregation. • C. Consolidate placed concrete by inechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand-spading, rodding or tamping. Use equipment and procedures for consolidation of concrete in accordance with ACI recommended practices. D. Placing Concrete Slabs: De}�osit and consolidatf;concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints,until the placing of a panel or section is completed. E. Consolidate concrete during placing operations so that concrete is thoroughly warked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. F. Bring slab surfaces to correct level with straightedge and strikeoff. Use bull floats or darbies to sinooth surface, free of humps or hollows. I)o not disturb slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations. G. Maintain reinforcing in proper position during concrete placement operations. 3.5 MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES A. Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive trowel finish and other � finishes as hereinafter specified. 4. After screeding, consolidating and leveling concrete slabs, do not work surface until ready for floating. Begin floating when surface water has disappeared or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power-driven floats, or both consolidate surface with power-driven floats, or by hand-floating if area is small or inaccessible to SECTION 03300-CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE Page 5 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 power units. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Unifonnly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling,refloat surface to a uniform, smooth, granular texture. B. Trowel Finish: Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces to be exposed-to-view, and slab surfaces to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile. 5. After floating, begin first trowel finish operation using a power-driven trowel. Begin final troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over surface. Consolidate concrete surface by final hand-troweling operation, free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth surface defects which would telegraph through applied floar covering systein. C. Slabs should meet the following flatness criteria measured according to ASTM E 1155: a. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 35; and levelness, F(L) 25; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and levelness, F(L) 17; for slabs-on- grade. D. Trowel and Fine Broom Finish: Where ceramic or paver tile is to be installed with thin-set mortar, apply trowel finish as specified, then immediately follow with slightly scarifying surface by fine brooming. 3.6 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. B. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after placing and finishing. Weather pennitting,keep continuously moist for not less than seven days. C. Begin final curing procedures immediately following initial curing and before concrete has dried. Continue final curin� for at least 7 days in accordance with ACI 30l procedures. Avoid rapid drying at end of final curing period. D. Do not use men7brane curing compounds on surfaces which are to be covered with flooring (such as ceramic or paver tile, glue-down carpet), painting, and other coatings and finish materials, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. E. Curing Fonned Surfaces: Cure fonned concrete surfaces by moist curing with fonns in place for full curing period or until fonns are removed. If fonns are removed, continue curing by methods specified above, as applicable. F. Final cure concrete surfaces to receive finish flooring by use of moisture-retaining cover, unless otherwise indicated. 3.7 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS SECTION 03300-CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE Page 6 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,W ashington 07-16-13 A. Filling-In: Fill-in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place and cure concrete as herein specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete work. 3.8 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION A. Sampling and testing for quality control during placement of concrete shall include the following: a. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to coinpl3�with ASTM C 94. 1. Slump: ASTM C 143; test for each set of compressive strength test specimens. Provide additional slump tests whenever the workability of the delivered concrete is in question. 2. Air Content: ASTM C 173, volumet:ric method for lightweight or nonnal weight concrete; ASTM C 231 pressure method for normal weight concrete; one for each type of air-entrained concrete, for each set of compressive strength test specimens. 3. Concrete Temperature: Test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg.F and below, and when 80 deg.F,and above; and each timE,a set of compression test specimens is made. 4. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each day's pour exceeding 5 cu.yds. plus additional sets for each 50 cu.yds. over and above the first 25 cu.yds. of each concrete class placed in any one day; one specimen tested at 7 days, two specimen tested at 28 days. 5. When frequency of testing will provide less than 5 strength tests for a given class of concrete, conduct testing from at least 5 randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. 6. When strength of' field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective procedures far protecting and curing the in-place co»crete. b. Test results will be reported in writing to Architect and Contractor with.in 24 hours that tests are inade. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing service, concrete type and class, location of conerete batch in structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix p:roportions and materials; compressive breaking strength and type of break for both 7 day tests and 28-day tests. c. Nondestructive Testing: Iinpact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted but shall not be used as the sole basis for acceptance or rejection. SECTION 03300-CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE Page 7 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 d. Additional Tests: The testing service will make additional tests of in-place concrete when test results indicate speci�ed concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in the structure, as directed by contractor /Architect. Testing service may conduct tests to detennine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed. SUB-Contractor shall pay for such tests conducted, and any other additional testing as may be required, when unacceptable concrete is verified. END OF SECTION 03300 SECTION 03300-CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE page g OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 SECTION 06100—ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 -GENERAL l.l SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Wood grounds,nailers,and blocking. 2. Plywood backing panels. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Rough carpentry includes carpentry work not specified as part of other Sections and generally not exposed,unless other��ise specified. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product data for the follo�ving products: B. Wood treatment data as follows including chemical treatment manufacturer's instructions for handling storing,installation, and finishing of treated material: 1. For each rype of preservative treated wo�od product include certification by treating plant stating type of preservative solution and pressure process used, net amount of preservative retained, and compliance wi,th applicable standards. 2. For fire-retardant-treated wood products include certification by treating plant that treated material complies with specified standar��and other requirements. 3. Material test reports from qualified independent testing laboratory indicated and interpreting test results relative to compliance of fire-retardant-treated wood products with requirements indicated. 4. Warranty of chemical treahnent inanufacturer for each type of trearinent. l.4 QUALITY ASSURANCF. A. Single-Source Responsibility for Fire Retardant Treated Wood: Obtain each type of fire-retardant-treated wood products from or�e source for both treatment and fire-retardant fonnulation. B. Source Limitations for Engineered Wood Pr��ducts: Obtain each type of engineered wood product through one source from a single manufacturer. SECTION 06100—ROUGH CARPENTRY PAGE 1 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Delivery and Storage: Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber as well as plywood and other panels; provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings including polyethylene and similar material. 1. For lumber pressure treated with waterborne chemicals, place spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.l LUMBER,GENERAL A. Lumber Standards: Manufacture lumber to comply with PS 20 "American Softwood Lumber Standard" and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards Committee's(ALSC) Board of Review. B. Inspection Agencies: Inspection agencies and the abbreviations used to reference with lumber grades and species include the following: 1. NLGA-National Lumber Grades Authority. 2. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 3. WCLIB -West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 4. WWPA-Western Wood Products Association. C. Grade Stamps: Provide lumber with each piece factory-marked with grade stainp of inspection agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency, grade, species,moisture content at time of surfacing,and mill. D. Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detail dimensions. Provide actual sizes as required by PS 20, for moisture content specified for each use. 1. Provide dressed luinber, S4S,unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide seasoned lumber with 19 percent inaximum moisture content at time of dressing and shipment for sizes 2-inches or less in noininal thickness,unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 BOARDS A. Concealed Boards: Where boards will be concealed by other work, provide lumber of 19 percent maximum moisture content(S-DRY KD-19)and of following species and grade: 1. Southern Pine No. 2 Boards SPIB rules or any species graded "Construction Boards" or "No. 3 Common"WCLIB or WWPA rules or"No. 2 Boards"per SPIB rules. SECTION 06100—ROUGH CARPENTRY PAGE 2 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction including rooftop eyuipment curbs and support bases, cant strips, bucks, nailers, blocking, furring, grounds, stripping,and similar members. B. Fabricate iniscellaneous luinber from diinension lumber of sizes indicated and into shapes shown. C. Moisture Content: 19 percent maximum for lumber items not specified to receive wood preservative treatment. 2.4 CONSTRUCTION PANELS,GENERAL A. Construction Panel Standards: Comply with PS 1 "U.S. Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood" for plywood construction panels and, for products not manufactured under PS 1 provisions,with APA PRP-108. B. Trademark: Factory-mark each construction panel with APA trademark evidencing compliance with grade requirements. C. Engineered Wood Products: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that show compliance with building code in effect for Proj ect. 1. Allowable Design Stresses: Meet or exceed those indicated per manufacturer's published values detennined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing perfonned by a qualified independent testing agency. 2.5 CONSTRUCTION PANELS FOR BACKING A. Plywood Backing Panels: For mounting electrical or telephone equipment, provide fire-retardant-treated plywood panels with grade designation, APA B-C PLUGGED EXPOSURE ], in thickness indicated,or,if no�r otherwise indicated,not less than 15/32-inch. 2.6 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type irndicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. 1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners witli a hot-dip zinc coating per ASTM A 153 or of AISl Type 304 stainless steel. B. Nails,Wire,and Staples: FS FF-N-105. C. Power Driven Fasteners: National Evaluation lteport NER-272. SECTION 06100—ROUGH CARPENTRY PAGE 3 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 D. Wood Screws: ANSI B 18.6.1. E. Lag Bolts: ANSI B 18.2.1. F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and where indicated,flat washers. 2.7 PRESERVATIVE WOOD TREATMENT BY PRESSURE PROCESS A. General: Where lumber or plywood is indicated as preservative-treated wood or is specified herein to be treated, comply with applicable requirements of AWPA Standards C2 (Lumber) and C9 (Plywood). Mark each treated item with the AWPB or SPIB Quality Mark Requirements. B. Pressure-treat above-ground iteins with water-borne preservatives to a miniinum retention of 025 pcf. For interior uses, after treatment, kiln-dry lumber and plywood to a maximuin moisture content,respectively, of 19 percent. Treat indicated items and the following: 1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking and similar members in connection with roofing, and flashing. 2. Wood sills, blocking, furring and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. C. Complete fabrication of treated items prior to trearinent, where possible. If cut after treatment, coat cut surfaces to comply with AWPA M4. Inspect each piece of lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces. PART3 -EXECUTION 3.1 1NSTALLATION, GENERAL 1. Discard units of material with defects that impair qualiry of rough carpentry construction and that are too small to use in fabricating rough carpentry with ininiinum joints or optimum joint arrangement. B. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb and true to line and cut and fitted. C. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by ancl�oring and fastening as indicated on Structural Drawings and to comply with all applicable building codes and authorities having jurisdiction. D. Use common wire nails, except as otherwise indicated. Use finishing nails for finishing work. Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate inembers where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting of wood;predrill as required. E. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. SECTION 06100—ROUGH CARPENTRY PAGE 4 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 32 WOOD GROUNDS,NA[LERS,AND BLOCKING A. Install wood grounds, nailers, and blocking wbere shown and where required for attachment of other work. Form to shapes as shown and cu�t as required for true line and level of work to be attached. Coordinate location with other work involved. B. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Build into masonry during installation of masonry work. Where possible, anchor to fonnwork before concrete placement. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS A. GeneraL• Comply with applicable recomme:ndations contained in Fonn No. E 30, "APA Design/Construction Guide - Residential & Cominercial", for rypes of construction panels and applications indicated. B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below: 1. Plywood Backing Panels: Nail or screw to supports. END OF SECTION 06100 SECTION 06100—ROUGH CARPENTRY PAGE 5 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 SECTION 06402—INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes interior woodwork includling for the following applications: 1. Plastic-laminate countertops. 2. Finish hardware for cabinets 3. Wood cabinets and millwork 4. Wood front cabinets 5. MDF Triin 6. Wood Trim 7. Door framing and casings 8. Borrow lite framing and casings B. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shiins, and hanging strips, unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. C. Related sections include the following: l. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for furring, blocking, and other carpentry work that is not exposed to view. 2. Division 8 Section "Stile and Rail Wc�od Doors" for doors specified by reference to architectural woodwork standards. 3. Division 9 Section "Painting"for touch-�ap of standing and running trim. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Finishing materials and processes. B. Shop Drawings: Include location of each item, plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices,and other components. ]. Show work of other trades adjacent to or within casework or inillwork items. Include location of in wall blocking required for attachinent of items to partitions. 2. Show Security Equipment,Appliances and Owner furnished iteins C. Samples 1. Plastic-laminate-clad panel products,for each type, color,pattern,and surface finish. 2. Lumber for opaque finish,50 sq. in. SECTION 06402 INTERIOR ARCHIITECTURAL WOODWORK PAGE 1 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-]6-13 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of woodwark. B. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for grades of interiar architectural woodwork, construction, finishes, and other requirements. 1. Provide AWI certification labels or compliance certificate indicating that woodwork complies with requirements of grades specified. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver ar install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at levels planned for building occupants during the remainder of the construction period. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified,unless otherwise indicated. B. Thennoset Decorative Overlay: Particleboard complying with ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, or mediuin-density fiberboard complying with ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, with surface of thennally fused,inelamine-impregnated decorative paper complying with LMA SAT-1. C. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, �rades as indicated, or if not indicated, as required by woodwork yuality standard. 1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide high-pressure decarative laminates by one of the following or approved equal: a. Fonnica Corporation. b. International Paper; Decorative Products Div. c. Laminart. d. Pioneer Plastics Corp. (Pionite) e. Westinghouse Electric Corp.; Specialty Products Div. £ Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International,Inc. 22 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets as identified below and on Drawings. SECTION 06402 INTERIOR ARCHIITECTURAL WOODWORK PAGE 2 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 B. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 135 degrees of opening. C. Back-Mounted Pulls: BHMA A156.9,B02011. D. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013. E. Drawer Slides: Side-inounted, full-extension, zinc-plated steel drawer slides with steel ball bearings,BHMA A156.9,B05091,and rated for the following loads: 1. Box Drawer Slides: 1001bf(440 N). 2. File Drawer Slides: 200 lbf(890 N). 3. Pencil Drawer Slides: 45 lbf(200 N). 4. Keyboard Slide: 75 lbf(330 N). 5. Trash Bin Slides: l SO lbf(670 N). F. Aluminum Slides for Sliding Glass Doors: BHMA A156.9, B07063. G. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11,E07121. H. Drawer Locks: BHMA A 156.11,E07041. I. Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage. 1. Product: Subject to compliance wit}� requirements, provide "SG series" by Doug Mockett and Co., Inc. Color to be selected by Architect from manufacturers full range of standard colors. J. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number 613-640 (antiyue bronze - oiled) or as indicated in Section 09000"Material L,egend". K. For concealed hardware,}�rovide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A 156.9. 2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous-meta] or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as reyuired for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors. 2.4 FABRICATION,GENERAL A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Provide Custom grade interior woodwork complying with the referenced quality standard. SECTION 06402 INTERIOR ARCHIITECTURAL WO�DWORK PAGE 3 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture content in relation to ainbient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation areas. C. Fabricate woodwork to diinensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated far the following: 1. Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members and Rails: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). D. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum extent possible,before shipinent to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming,and fitting. 1. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field ineasurements indicated on Shop Drawings before disassembling for shipment. E. Shop cut openings, to maxunum extent possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and siinilar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. 1. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish. F. Install glass to comply with applicable requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing" and in GANA's "Glazing Manual." For glass in wood frames, secure glass with removable stops. 2.5 PLASTIC-LAMINATE CABINETS � A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for laminate cabinets. B. Grade: Custom. C. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay. D. Laininate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laininate complying with the following requirements: 1. Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: HGS. 2. Postfonned Surfaces: HGP. 3. Vertical Surfaces: HGS. 4. Edges: PVC tape, O.Ol8-inch (0.460-mm) minimum thickness, matching laminate in color,pattern,and finish. E. Materials for Seiniexposed Surfaces: Provide surface materials indicated below: 1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Thennoset decorative overlay. SECTION 06402 INTERIOR ARCHIITECTURAL WOODWORK PAGE 4 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Thennoset decorative overlay. 3. Drawer Bottoms: 77iennoset decorative overlay. F. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materi,�ls and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with tlie following requirements: 1. See Architectural Drawings. 2.6 PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requireinents for high-pressure decorative laminate countertops. B. Grade: Custom. C. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGS. D. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide inateri,als and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1. See Architectural Drawings. E. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces F. Core Material: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard. G. Core Material at Sinks: Particleboard made with exterior glue. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.l COORDINATION A. Coordinate with and provide clearances, anchorage etc. as required for residential appliances as specified in Section 11451. B. Coordinate with and pro��ide clearances, anchorage etc. as reyuired for Security Equipment as specified in Section 1 l 700 and Owner supplied equipment. C. Coordinate with Electrical Sub-Contractor to p�rovide access and raceways as needed for power and data cabling required for equipment and outlets. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas and examine and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming before installation. B. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for the same grade specified in this Section for type of woodwork involved. SECTION 06402 INTERIOR ARCHIITECTURAL WO�DWORK PAGE 5 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches. Shim as required with concealed shims. D. Scribe and cut woodwark to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces and repair damaged finish at cuts. E. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated. F. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop. Calk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." G. Sills: Anchor to blocking with blind fasteners—caulk perimeter of sill, between drywall returns and aluminum window framing with sealant specified in Division 7 Section"Joint Sealants". END OF SECTION 06402 SECTION 064021NTERIOR ARCHIITECTURAL WOODWORK PAGE 6 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 SECTION 06640-PLASTIC PANL='LING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes glass-fiber reinforced plastic(FRP) wall paneling and trim accessories. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples: For plastic paneling. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As detenn�ined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame-Spread IndeK: 200 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed [ndex: 450 or less. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 PLASTIC SHEET PANEL,ING A. General: Gelcoat-finished, glass-fiber reinforc�ed plastic panels complying with ASTM D 5319. l. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance With requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Kemlite Company Inc. b. Marlite. c. Nudo Products, Inc. d. Architect approved equal. 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.09 inch 3. Surface Finish: Smooth. 4. Color: White. SECTION 06640-PLASTIC PANELING Page 1 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 22 ACCESSORIES A. Trim Accessories: Manufacturer's standard one-piece vinyl extrusions designed to retain and cover edges of panels. Provide division bars, inside corners, and caps as needed to conceal edges. 1. Color: Match panels. B. Adhesive: As recominended by plastic paneling manufacturer. C. Sealant: Single-component, mildew-resistant, neutral-curing silicone sealant recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer and complying with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of adhesive, including oil, grease, dirt, and dust. B. Condition panels by unpacking and placing in installation space before installation according to manufacturer's written recommendations. C. Lay out paneling before installing. Locate panel joints to provide equal panels at ends of walls not less than half the width of full panels. 32 INSTALLATION A. Install plastic paneling according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Install panels in a full spread of adhesive. C. Install trim accessories with adhesive. Do not fasten through panels. D. Fill grooves in trim accessories with sealant before installing panels and bed inside corner trim in a bead of sealant. E. Remove excess sealant and smears as paneling is installed. Clean with solvent recommended by sealant manufacturer and then wipe with clean dry cloths until no residue remains. END OF SECTION 06640 SECTION 06640-PLASTIC PANELING page 2 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Sound attenuation insulation. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 9 Sections "Gypsum Board Assemblies and "Gypsum Board Shaft-Wall Assemblies" for installation in metal-framed assemblies of insulation specified by referencing this Section. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: Insulation composed of rock-wool fibers, slag-wool fibers, or glass fibers;produced in boards and blanket with latter formed into batts (flat-cut lengths)or rolls. B. Thermal Resistivity: Where thennal resistivity properties of insulation materials are designated by r-values they represent the rate of heat flow through a homogenous material exactly 1-inch thick, measured by test method included in referenced material standard or otherwise indicated. They are expressed by the temperature difference in degrees F between the two exposed faces required to cause one BTU to flow through �one square foot per hour at mean temperatures indicated. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Plenuin Rating: Provide glass-fiber insulatiori where indicated in ceiling plenums whose test perforn�ance is rated as follows for use in plenums as detennined by testing identical products per "Erosion Test" and "Mold Growth and Humidity Test" described in UL 181, or on comparable tests from another standard acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Erosion Test Results: Insulation shows no visible evidence of cracking, flaking,peeling, or delamination of interior surface of durt assembly, after testing for 4 hours at 2500-fpm air velocity. 2. Mold Growth and Humidity Test Result:�: Insulation shows no evidence of mold growth, delamination, or other deterioration due to the effects of high humidiry, after inoculation with Chaetomium globosium on all sL�rfaces and storing for 60 days at 100 percent relative humidity in the dark. SECTION 07210—BUILDING INSULATION Page 1 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's product literature and installation instructions for each type of product indicated. B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests perfonned by a qualified testing agency for insulation products. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Liinitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test- response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84. 2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119. 3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing,and protecting during installation. B. Protect plastic insulation as follows: 1. Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to Project site before installation time. 3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction. 1.8 JOB CONDITIONS A. Contractor and Installer inust examine the substrate and the conditions under which insulation work is to be perfonned and notify the Architect or Design-Builder in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. B. Weather Conditions: Proceed with work only when weather conditions are in compliance with manufacturer's recommended ]imitations, and when conditions will permit the work to proceed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. SECTION 07210—BUILDING INSULATION Page 2 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 C. Coordinate this work with all other trades and��rotect it after installation. PART2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles wl�ere titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance��ith requirements,provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION A. Manufacturers: 1. CertainTeed Corparation. 2. Johns Manville. 3. Knauf Fiber Glass. 4. Owens Corning. 5. An Architect approved equal. B. Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: AS�TM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50,respectively;passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. C. Where glass-fiber blanket insulation is indicated by the following thicknesses, provide blankets in batt or roll form with thermal resistances indicated: 1. 3-1/2 inches thick with a thennal resistarice of 13 deg F x h x sq. ft.Btu at 75 deg F 2.3 INSULATION FASTEN�iRS A. Adhesively Attached, Spindle-Type Anchors: Plate welded to projecting spindle; capable of holding insulation of thickness indicated secur�;ly in position indicated with self-locking washer in place; and complying w�ith the following req�uireinents: B. Adhesively Attached, Angle-Shaped, Spindle-Type Anchors: Angle welded to projecting spindle; capable of holding insulation of thickriess indicated securely in position indicated with self-locking washer in place; and complying with the following requireinents: C. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking w<<shers fonned from OA16-inch- thick galvanized steel sheet, with beveled edge for increased stiffness, sized as required to hold insulation securely in place,but not less than 1-1/2 inches square or in diameter. SECTION 07210—BUILDING INSULATION Page 3 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 D. Insulation Standoff: Spacer fabricated from galvanized mild-steel sheet for fitting over spindle of insulation anchor to maintain air space of 1 inch between face of insulation and substrate to which anchor is attached. E. Anchor Adhesive: Product with deinonstrated capability to bond insulation anchors securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation,fasteners,and substrates. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Exainine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements of Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and for other conditions affecting performance. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances hannful to insulation or vapor retarders, including removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or of interfering with insulation attachment. 3.3 INSTALLATION,GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated. B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any time to ice,rain,and snow. C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. D. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located within insulated exterior walls, coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation encapsulates piping. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF SOUND ATTENUATION INSULATION A. Install sound attenuation blankets in sound rated partitions and ceilings,where indicated. B. Completely fill space between studs and framing to full height of partition or full area of ceiling. C. Fit carefully behind electrical outlets and other work penetrating sound-rated construction. SECTION 07210—BUILDING INSULATION Page 4 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 D. Install 3-inch- thick, unfaced glass-fiber blank:et insulation over suspended ceilings at partitions stopping below the ceiling, in a width that extends insulation a minimum of 48 inches on either side of partition. E. Install 3-inch- thick, unfaced glass-fiber blanket insulation over suspended ceilings so that insulation extends over entire ceiling area wllere indicated on Drawings and where partitions extend above the ceiling. F. Install sound attenuation blankets in gaps between steel deck flutes and tops of sound-rated partitions, which are not fire-rated. Attach blankets in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide ternporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. END OF SECTION 07210END OF SECTION 07210 SECTION 07210—BUILDING INSULATION Page 5 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 SECTION 07415 - COMPOSITE V�'ALL PANELS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Subinittals: Product Data, Shop Drawings, and color Samples. B. Provide a composite building panel which has been pretested by an independent testing laboratory to provide specified resistance to air and water infiltration and structural deflection, when installed. C. Structural Deflection: Deflection of perimeter framing members shall not exceed L/175 of span length or '/ inches, whichever is less; or the:re shall be no permanent set in excess of .100 inches. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicatt:d. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of inetal-faced composite wall panels; details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attach�nent system, triin, flashings, closures, and access��ries; and special details. Distinguish among factory-, shop-,and field-assembled work. C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required. D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For metal-faced composite wall panel assembly indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data and calculations signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. E. Coordination Drawings: Exterior elevations, dlrawn to scale, on which the following iteins are shown and coordinated with each other. F. Product test reports. G. Maintenance data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCI:: A. Panel system fabricator shall have a minimu�n of five (5)years experience. B. The panel system installer shall be responsible for a coinplete, sealed and weathertight installation. COMPOSITE WALL PANELS 07415 - 1 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 C. Warranties: Provide standard manufacturer's written warranty, without monetary limitation, signed by manufacturer agreeing to promptly repair or replace products that fail in materials or workmanship for the period of 5 years. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard fonn in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal-faced composite wall panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Coinpletion. PART2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURES A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for systems is based on Alucobond Aluminum Composite Panel Rout and Return System. Subject to coinpliance, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following or an approved equal. 1. Alpolic 2. Reynobond 2.2 MATERIALS A. Composition: Two sheets of 0.019 aluminum sandwiching a core of extruded thermoplastic formed in a continuous process with no glues or adhesives between dissimilar materials. Preferred total thickness of panel shall be 4mm (approx. 3/16). B. Aluminum Finishes: High-performance organic;AA-C 12C42R 1 x;two-coat fluoropolymer system complying with AAMA 605.2,with finish coats containing at least 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight. 1. Color: to match adjacent storefront finish. 2.3 PANEL SYSTEM A. The aluminum composite panel shall be installed in aluminum storefront system. B. Detail and fabricate panels to the sizes,configurations and layouts as shown on the approved shop drawings. C. Grain pattern of anodized and metallic finished aluminum facing sheets to run in same direction,unless otherwise specified. D. Provide protective film on exposed panel faces and leave in place during fabrication. COMPOSITE WALL PANELS 07415 -2 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,W ashington 07-]6-13 2.4 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate and finish metal-faced composite wall panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible,by manufacturer's st:andard procedures and processes,as necessary to fulfill indicated perfonnance requirements de�monstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and witl� dimensional and structural requirements. B. Fabricate metal-faced composite wall panels in a manner that eliminates condensation on interior side of panel and with joints between panels designed to fonn weathertight seals. C. Metal-Faced Composite Wall Panels: Factory fonn panels in a continuous process with no glues or adhesives between dissimilar materials. Trim and square edges of sheets with no displacement of face sheets or protrusion of core material. 1. Form panel lines, breaks, and angles to be sharp and true, with surfaces free from warp and buckle. 2. Fabricate panels with sharply cut edges,with no displacement of face sheets or protrusion of core material. 3. Fabricate panels with panel stiffeners, as required to comply with deflection limits, attached to back of panels with structural silicone sealant or bond tape. 4. Dimensional Tolerances: a. Panel Bow: 0.8 percent maximum of panel length or width. b. Squareness: 0.25 inch (5 mm)maximum. D. Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Miscellaneous Framing: Install subgirts, base angles, sills, furring, and other miscellaneous wall panel support members and anchorag�e according to ASTM C 754 and metal-faced composite wall panel manufacturer's written instructions. 3.2 CLEANiNG A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal-faced composite wall panels are installed unless otberwise i.ndicated in manufacturer's written installation insri-uctions. On completion of inetal-faced composite wall panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by panel manufa��turer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. END OF SECTION 07415 COMPOSITE WALL PANELS 07415 - 3 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 SECTION 07920-JOINT SEALERS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Sealants and joint backing. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C 834 - Standard Specification for Latex Sealants; 2010. B. ASTM C 920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants;2010. C. ASTM C 1311 - Standard Specification for Solvent Release Sealants; 2010. D. ASTM C 1330- Standard Specification for Cyl:indrical Sealant Backing for Use with Cold Liy- uid Applied Sealants; 2007. E. ASTM C 1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joi:nt Sealants; 2009. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant c;hemical characteristics,perfonnance criteria, substrate preparation,limitations, color availability, and coinpatibility and adhesion test reports. B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of c;omprehensive tests perfonned by a qualified testing agency,indicating that sealants comply with requirements. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, surface preparation, and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units reyuired far this Project. B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conferenre at Project site. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after installation. B. Do not proceed with installation of sealants when joint substrates are wet,joint widths are less than allowed by the inanufacturer for applications indicated or conta�ninants capable of interfer- ing with adhesion have not yet been removed fi-om joint substrate. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Installer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard fonn in which Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with perfonnance and other requirements specified within a Two year period after Date of Substantial Completion. SECTION 07920—JOINT SEALANTS Page 1 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 B. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard fonn in which sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified within Five years from date of Substantial Completion specified warran- ty period. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SEALANTS A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants,backings,and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application,as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer,based on testing and field experience. B. General Purpose Interior Sealant: Acrylic emulsion latex;ASTM C 834,Type OP,Grade NF single component,paintable. 1. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. 2. Products: a. Sonolac; BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems: www.chemrex.com. b. AG20+; Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com. c. Architect Approved Equal. 3. Applications: Use for: a. Interior wall and ceiling control joints. b. Joints between door and window frames and wall surfaces. c. Other interior joints for which no other type of sealant is indicated. C. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C ]311, single component, solvent release. 1. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. 2. Products: a. Chem-Calk 300;Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com b. BG158; Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.coin c. Architect Approved Equal 3. Applications: Use for: a. Joints with moderate inovement not exposed to view. b. Concealed sealant bead in sheet metal work. c. Under exterior door thresholds. d. Secondary window seals. D. Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920,Grade NS,Class 25, Uses NT,A, G, M,O; single component, acid curing, non-sagging,non-staining,non-bleeding. 1. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. 2. Products: a. Chem-Calk 1200; Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com b. 999 A; Dow Corning Corp: www.dowcorning.com/construction c. Contractors SCS1000;Momentive Performance Materials, Inc(fonnerly GE Sili- cones): www.momentive.com. d. 860 ; Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com e. Architect Approved Equal SECTION 07920—JOINT SEALANTS Page 2 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 3. Applications: Use for: a. Glazing applications and cap seals b. General sealing. E. Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920,Grade NS,Class 50 and 100/50,Uses NT,A,G, M,O; single component,neutral curing,non-sagging,non-staining,non-bleeding. 1. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. 2. Products: a. 795 and 756 SMS; Dow Corning Corp: www.dowcorning.com/construction b. SilPruf SCS2000 and SilPruf LM SC�2700; Momentive Performance Materials,Inc (fonnerly GE Silicones): www.mom�entive.com. c. 890 FST and 895 NST; Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com d. Architect Approved Equal 3. Applications: Use for: a. Glazing applications and cap seals 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Primer: Non-staining type,recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. B. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type,recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forn�ing materials. C. Joint Backing Provide sealant backings of material that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants,primers,and other joimt fillers; and are approved for applications indi- cated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. 1. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330,Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin),Type O(open-cell material),Type Et (bicellular material with a surface skin),or any of the preceding types,as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint appli- cation indicated, and of size and densiry to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimuin sealant performana�. D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit applica- tion. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated tc>receive joint sealants,with Installer and Design-Builder representa- tive present,for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant peri-onnance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter that could impair adhesion of sealant. B. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Perfonn preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C 1193. SECTION 07920—JOINT SEALANTS Page 3 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 E. Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfigurement. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Perfonn work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of surfac- es and material installation instructions. B. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C 1193. C. Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to achieve width-to-depth ratio,neck dimen- sion, and surface bond area as recommended by manufacturer. D. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used. E. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter,ridges, and sags. F. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. G. Tool joints immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins. Tool sealants to form smooth,uniform beads; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and ad- hesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Provide concave joint profile and flush joint profile where indicated. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform adhesion tests in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C 1193,Ap- pendix X 1 -Method A,Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand-Pull Tab. 1. Perform 5 tests far first 1,000 lineer feet of applied sealant and 1 test for each 1,000 feet seal thereafter or perfonn 1 test per floor per building elevation minimum. 2. For sealant applied between dissunilar materials, test both sides of joint. B. Sealants failing adhesion test shall be removed, substrates cleaned, sealants re-installed,and re- testing perfonned. C. Maintain test log and submit report to Architect indicating tests,locations, dates,results, and reinedial actions. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by inethods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of prod- ucts in which joints occur. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deteriaration or damage at tiine of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. END OF SECTION SECTION 07920—JOINT SEALANTS Page 4 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 SECTION 08110- STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Standard hollow frames. B. Related Sections 1. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware"-for door hardware. 2. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for spot-grouting of frames installed in steel framed gypsum board partitions. 3. Division 9 Sections "Painting" for field painting hollow metal doors and frames. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product in��icated. Include construction details, material descriptions,core descriptions,fire-resistance rating, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Include the following: 1. Elevations of each door type design. 2. Details of doors,including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal thicknesses. 3. Frame details for each frame type,includ.ing dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 6. Details of anchorages,joints,field splices, and connections. 7. Details of accessories. 8. Details of moldings,removable stops,and glazing. 9. Details of conduit a�ld preparations for power, signal,and control systems. C. Oversize Construction Certification: For assemblies required to be fire rated and exceeding limitations of labeled assemblies. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCF. A. Source Limitations: Obtaiu hollow metal work from single source from single manufacturer. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, .AND HANDLING A. Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic or canvas shelters. SECTION 08110—STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES Page 1 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished units. B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions. C. Inspect frames on delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished items match new work and are acceptable to Architect; otherwise, remove and replace damaged items as directed. D. Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units maximuin in a vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inch high wood blocking. Do not store in a manner that traps excess humidity. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts,and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. PART2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company. 2. Curries Company;an Assa Abloy Group company. 3. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company. 4. An Architect approved equal. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications. B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Cominercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum A40(ZF120)metallic coating. C. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Cominercial Steel (CS), 40Z coating desi�nation; inill phosphatized. 1. For ancl�ors built into exterior walls, steel sheet coinplying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1O11M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B. D. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners where items are to be built into exterior walls: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M. SECTION 08110—STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES page 2 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,W ashington 07-16-13 E. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches, as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M. F. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool with 6- to 12-Ib/cu. ft. density; with maxiinum flame-spread and smoke-development indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. G. Glazing: Coinply with requirements in Division 8 Section"Glazing." H. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for l5-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components,and other deleterious impurities. 2.3 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES A. General: Comply with ANSUSDI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile. B. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet unless metallic-coated sheet is indicated. 1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. 2. Fabricate frames as full profile welded unless otherwise indicated. 3. Frames for Wood Doors: 0.053-inch- thick steel sheet. C. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinfarcement plates from same material as frames. 2.4 FRAME ANCHORS A. Jamb Anchors: l. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch thick. 2. Postinstalled Expansion Type far In-�Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inch- diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinfc�rceinent plate,welded to frame at each anchor location. B. Floor Anchors: Fonned from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch thick, and as follows: ]. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-rype anchors,with two boles to receive fasteners. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames,not less than 0.016 inch thick. SECTION 08110—STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES Page 3 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 2.6 FABRICATION A. Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately fonn metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of inetal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site,clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment. B. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117. C. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. 1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress,and make smooth, flush,and invisible. 2. Sidelight Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding. 3. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 4. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted. 5. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot welds per anchor. 6. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: a. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: 1) Three anchors per jambs up to 90 inches high. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high. 3) Two anchors per head for fraines over 42 inches wide and mounted in metal-stud partitions. b. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c. 7. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors,drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction. a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers. D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, edge channels, and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet. E. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware." 1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated,according to ANSI/SDI A250.8. SECTION 08110—STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES Page 4 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surface-mounted door hardware. 3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware. 4. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with Division 16 Sections. 2.7 STEEL FINISHES A. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standarci primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating. 1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, rust inhibiting primer complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied finish coatings despite prolonged exposure. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions; for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting perFormance of the Work. B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. � Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal fraines for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumbness all to a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 incb (1.6 mm) and as further outlined in ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 86l C. Drill and tap doors and frames as requiredl to receive non-templated, inortised, and surface- mounted door hardware. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. SECTION 08110—STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES Page 5 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 B. Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11. 1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until pennanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. At fire-protection-rated openings,install frames according to NFPA 80. b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind,fill,dress,and make splice smooth,flush,and invisible on exposed faces. c. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening. d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured. f. Check pluinbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. g. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with grout containing antifreezing agents. 2. Except for door frames located in existing concrete or concrete tilt-up panel construction, place door frames before constructing the enclosing walls. 3. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with expansion anchors. 4. Metal-Stud Partitions: Spot grout hollow metal door frames. a. Apply spot grout at each jamb anchor clip and iminediately insert gypsum panels into frame. b. Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind fraines after installation of spot grout. c. Coordinate and grout in place with the spot grouting of jamb anchors, electrical whips as required for electrified hardware such as strikes. 5. Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between fra�nes and concrete with grout. Take precautions,including bracing frames,to ensure that frames are not defonned or damaged by grout forces. 6. In-Place Concrete ar Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. 7. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist,and plumb following completion of wall construction. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in coinplete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped,bowed,or otherwise unacceptable. B. Remove grout and other bonding inaterial from hollow metal work iinmediately after installation. SECTION 08110—STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES Page 6 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, remove protective wrappings from doors and fraines, sand smooth rusted or dainaged areas of priine coat and apply touchup of coinpatible air-drying,rust-inhibitive primer. D. Metallio-Coated Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 08110 SECTION 08110—STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES Page 7 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,W ashington 07-16-13 SECTION 08211 -FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces. 2. Factory finishing flush wood doors. 3. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frame;s and factory machining for hardware. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" for hardware to be installed in flush wood doors. 2. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door ir►dicated. Include details of core and edge construction,louvers,and trim for openings. Include factory-finishing specifications. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Dat:a; location and extent of hardware blocking; and other pertinent data, including but not limited t��: 1. Indicate diinensions and locations of mo�rtises and holes for hardware. 2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts. 3. Indicate requirements for veneer matching. 4. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements. 5. Indicate fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors. C. Samples: 1. Factory finishes applied to actual door face inaterials, approximately 8 by 10 inches, for each material and finish. a. For each wood species and transparent finish,provide set of three samples showing typical range of color and grain to be expected in the�nished work. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors from single manufacturer. B. Qualiry Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated". SECTION 08211—FLUSH WOOD DOORS Page 1 _ _ _ OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 C. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL lOC. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons. C. Mark each door on bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weather-tight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard fonn in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include,but are not limited to,the following: a. Warping(bow, cup, or twist)more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section. b. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.0] inch in a 3-inch span. 2. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. 3. Warranty Period for Solid-Core Interior poors: Life of installation. PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. 2. Eggers Industries. 3. Graham; an Assa Abloy Group company. 4. An Architect approved equal. SECTION 08211 —FLUSH WOOD DOORS Page 2 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION,GENERAL A. Low-Einitting Materials: Provide doors made with adhesives and composite wood products that do not contain urea fonnaldehyde. B. WDMA I.S.I-A Perfonnance Grade: 1. Heavy Duty unless otherwise indicated. C. Particleboard-Core Doors: 1. Particleboard: ANS[A208.1, Grade LD�-1. 2. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as needed to eliininate through-bolting hardware. 3. Provide doors with either glued-wood-stave or structural-composite-lumber cores instead of particleboard cores for doors indicated to receive exit devices. D. Fire-Protection-Rated Doors: Provide coi•e specified for type of face indicated or manufacturer's standard mineral core construction as needed to provide fire-protection rating indicated. 1. Edge Construction: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by outer stile matching face veneer, and laminated backing for improved screw-holding capability and split resistance. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges. 2. Pairs: Provide fire-retardant stiles that are listed and labeled for applications indicated without fonned-steel edges and astragals Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges. 3. Hardware Blocking: Provide structural composite wood blocking with improved screw holding capability approved for use iri mineral core doors of fire protection ratings indicated as needed to eliininate through�-bolting of hardware. 2.3 VENEERED-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSP.ARENT F1N1SH A. Interior Solid-Core Doors : 1. Grade: Premium,with Grade A faces 2. Species: See"Materials Legend"on drawings. 3. Cut: See"Materials Legend"on drawin�;s. 4. Match between Ve�ieer Leaves: Book match. 5. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Balance match. 6. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors h,ung in same opening. 7. Core: Particleboard. 8. Construction: Sev�n plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive planed before veneering. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otlherwise indicated. SECTION 08211—FLUSH WOOD DOORS Page 3 _ _ _ _ __ _ _ _ OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 1. Comply with reyuirements in NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors. B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHl-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI A115-W series standards,and hardware templates. 1. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal fraines to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining. 2.5 FACTORY FINISHING A. GeneraL• Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and inachining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing. 1. Finish faces, all four edges,edges of cutouts,and inortises. . B. Finish doors at factory that are indicated to receive transparent finish. Field finish doors indicated to receive opaque finish. C. Transparent Finish: 1. Grade: Premium. 2. Finish: AWI TR-6 catalyzed polyurethane system. 3. Staining: Match Architect's sample. 4. Sheen: Match Architect's sample. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMiNATION A. Exainine doors and installed door fraines before hanging doors. 1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs. 2. Reject doors with defects. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions of doors to be installed or installed frames by others have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware." B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to coinply with inanufacturer's written instructions and the referenced quality standard,and as indicated. 1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80. SECTION 08211—FLUSH WOOD DOORS Page 4 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align a�ld fit doors in frames with unifonn clearances and bevels; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by inanufacturer or pennitted for fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining. l. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads,jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled,provide 1/4 inch from bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise indic;ated. D. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before�� installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site. E. Adjust,re-hang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. END OF SECTION 08211 SECTION 08211 —FLUSH WOOD DOORS Page 5 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 SECTION 08212- STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior stile and rail wood doors. 2. Finishing stile and rail wood doors. 3. Fitting stile and rail wood doors to frame�s and machining for hardware. 4. Prehanging doors in frames. 5. Fixed sidelights. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For stile and rail wood doors. Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; and other pertinent data. C. Samples: Represent typical range of color and grain for each species of veneer and solid luinber required. PART2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Use only materials that comply wi�th referenced standards and other requirements specified. Assemble exterior doors and sidelite;s with wet-use adhesives. 22 INTERIOR STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOOF:S A. Interior Stile and Rail Wood Doors: Inter�ior custom doors complying with the AWI's, AWMACs, and WI's "Architectural Wood�vork Standards," and with other requirements specified. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that�nay be incorporated into the Work include, but are not li�nited to, the following: 2. Basis-of-Desi�n Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide or comparable product by one of the following: a. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. b. Artistic Doors and Windows, Inc. SECTION 08212 - STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS PAGE 1 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 c. Belentrv Doors LLC. d. Dimension Millworks. e. EQ�ers Industries. f. Enio Architectural Millwork. g. Harrin Doors. h. Maiman Companv(The). i. Marshfield DoorSvsteins Inc. j. Pinecrest Inc. k. Select Door. l. Sun-Dor-Co. m. Woodtech Trading Company. 3. Grade: Premiuin. 4. Finish: Transparent. 5. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: Plain Sliced White Maple. 6. Door Construction for Transparent Finish: a. Stile and Rail Construction: Clear lumber;may be edge glued for width. b. Stile and Rail Construction: Veneered or veneered, edge- and end-glued clear lumber. c. Flat-Panel Construction: Veneered,wood-based panel product. 2.3 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOOR FABRICATION A. Fabricate stile and rail wood doors in sizes indicated for field fitting. B. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated, with the following uniform clearances and bevels unless otherwise indicated: 1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch (3 mm) at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/2 inch (13 mm) from bottom of doar to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide not more than 3/8 inch (10 mm) from bottom of door to top of threshold. a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors. 2. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3-1/2 degrees)at lock and hinge edges. 3. Bevel fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3-1/2 degrees) on lock edge; trim stiles and rails only to extent permitted by labeling agency. C. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. D. Glazed Openings: Trim openings indicated for glazing with solid wood moldings. Miter wood moldings at corner joints. E. Glazed Openings: Factory install glazing in doors, complying with Section 08800 "Glazing." Install glass using manufacturer's standard elastomeric glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920. Secure glass in place with removable wood moldings. Miter wood moldings at corner joints. SECTION 08212 - STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS PAGE 2 .__ ___ OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 F. Transom and Side Panels: Fabricate panels to match adjoining doors in materials, finish, and quality of construction. 2.4 FINISHING A. Finish wood doors at factory or woodworkin4; shop that are indicated to receive transparent finish. B. For doors indicated to be factory or shop finished, comply with the AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's"Architectural Woodwork Standards," and with other requirements specified. C. Use only paints and coatings that comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." D. Transparent Finish: 1. Grade: Premium. 2. Sheen: Satin. Match National furniture"Honey on Maple"(WilsonArt HN Honey). PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 08710 "Door Hardware." B. Installation Instructions: lnstall doors to comply with inanufacturer's written instructions and referenced quality standard, and as indicated. 1. Install fire-rated doors according to NFP.A 80. 2. Install smoke- and draft-control doors according to NFPA 105. C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with unifonn clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not ri-im stiles and rails in excess of ftimits set by manufacturer or permitted with fire- rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining. L Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch (3 mm) at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 3/8 inch (l 0 mm) froin bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise indicated. Wt►ere threshold is shown or scheduled,provide 3/8 inch(l0�nm) from bottoin of door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated. a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors. 2. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 i.nches(3-1/2 degrees)at lock and hinge edges. 3. Bevel fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inclles (3-1/2 degrees) on lock edge; trim stiles and rails only to extent pennitted by labeling agency. D. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for unifi�rm clearance at each edge. SECTION 08212 - STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS PAGE 3 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 END OF SECTION 082]2 SECTION 08212 - STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS PAGE 4 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 SECTION 08311 -ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Access doors and frames for walls and ceilings. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 9 Section "Acoustical Tile Ceilings" for suspended acoustical tile ceilings. 2. Division 9 Section "Painting" for field finishing of primed access doors and frames. 12 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of access door and frame indicated. Include construction details, materials,individual components and profiles, and finishes. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain access door(s) and frame(s) through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Size Variations: Obtain Architect's acceptance of manufacturer's standard-size units, which may vary slightly from sizes indicated. l.4 COORDINATION A. Verification: Detennine specific locations ancl sizes for access doors needed to gain access to concealed plumbing, mechanical, or other concealed work, and indicate in the schedule specified in "Subinittals" Article. PART2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 STEEL MATERIALS A. Steel Plates, Shapes,and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 1. ASTM A 123/A 123M,for galvanizing steel and iron products. 2. ASTM A 153/A 153M,for galvanizing steel and iron hardware. B. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M,Grade C or D. SECTION 08311—ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES Page 1 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 1. ASTM A 123/A 123M, for galvanizing steel and iron products 2. ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware. C. Steel Sheet: Uncoated cold-rolled steel sheet substrate complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel(CS),exposed. D. Steel Finishes: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recoimnendations for applying and designating finishes. 1. Surface Preparation for Steel Sheet: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning," to remove dirt, oil,grease, or other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, froin uncoated steel, complying with SSPC- SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling." 2. Factory-Primed Finish: Apply shop primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating. E. Drywall Beads: Edge trim formed from 0.0299-inch zinc-coated steel sheet formed to receive joint compound and in size to suit thickness of gypsum board. 2.2 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Babcock-Davis; A Cierra Products Co. 2. Jensen Industries. 3. J. L. Industries, Inc. 4. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 5. Milcor Inc. 6. An Architect approved equal. B. Flush Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Trim (non-public areas): Fabricated from steel sheet. ]. Locations: Wall and ceiling surfaces. 2. Door: Minimum OA60-inch- thick sheet metal, set flush with exposed face flange of frame. 3. Frame: Minimum 0.060-incb- thick sheet metal with 1-inch wide, surface-inounted trim. 4. Hinges: Spring-loaded, concealed-pin type. 5. Latch: Self-latching bolt operated by flush key with interior release. C. Flush Access Doors and Trimless Frames (all public areas): Fabricated from steel sheet. 1. Locations: Wall and ceiling surfaces. . 2. Door: Minimum 0.060-inch thick sheet metal,set flush with surrounding finish surfaces. 3. Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch thick sheet metal with drywall bead flange. 4. Hinges: Spring-loaded, concealed-pin type. 5. Latch: Self-latching bolt operated by flush key with interior release. SECTION 08311—ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES Page 2 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 2.3 FABRICATION A. General: Provide access door and frame ass�,mblies manufactured as integral units ready for installation. B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide inaterials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seain marks,roller marks,rolled trade naines, or roughness. C. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to types of supports indicated. 1. Exposed Flanges: Nominal 1 to 1-1/2 inches wide around perimeter of frame. 2. For trimless fraines with drywall bead, provide edge trim for gypsum board securely attached to perimeter of frames. 3. Provide mounting holes in frames for attachment of units to metal or wood framing. D. Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when closed. 1. For cylinder lock, furnish two keys per lock and key all locks alike. 2. For recessed panel doors,provide access sleeves for each locking device. Furnish plastic grommets and install in holes cut through finish. E. Extruded Aluminum: Af'ter fabrication, apply manufacturer's standard protective coating on aluminum that will come in contact with concrete. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructioris for installing access doors and frames. B. Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face panels aligned with adjacent finish surfaces. C. Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material. 32 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation. B. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped,bowed,or otherwise damaged. END OF SECTION 08311 SECTION 08311—ACCESS DOC)RS AND FRAMES Page 3 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 SECTION 08411 - ALUMINUM-F'[tAMED ENTRANCES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Exterior aluminum framed systems. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants"for s�ealants to the extent not specified in this Section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for aluminum- framed systems. B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Include details of provisions for drainage of moisture in the system to the exterior, attachment to other work, and sealant locations. Elevations must include glass type designations and identify all tempered uriits,as required. C. Sainples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard sizes. D. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. E. Welding certificates.For structural-sealant-glazed systems, retain first paragraph below and requirement for preconstruction sealant testing in "Quality Assurance"Article. F. Sealant Compatibility and Adhesion Test Rep�orts: From sealant manufacturer, indicating that materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with sealants; include joint sealant manufacturers' written interpretation of test results relative to sealant perfonnance and recominendations for primers and substrate preparation needed to obtain adhesion G. Installation lnstructions: Manufacturer's written installation instructions for each system provided shall be submitted prior to start of any work of this section, for infonnation and record purposes. a. Installer shall not deviate froin manufacturer's written instructions. H. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. SECTION 08411 —ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES Page 1 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. B. Accessible Entrances: Comply with applicable provisions in ADA Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG)and ICC/ANSI Al 17.1. C. Source Limitations for Aluminum Entrance Systems: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer. D. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code-Aluminum." E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of structural supports for aluminum-framed systems by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed systems that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include,but are not limited to, the following: a. Noise or vibration caused by thennal movements. b. Deterioration of inetals,metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. c. Adhesive or cohesive sealant failures,including cracking or discoloration. d. Water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas. e. Failure of operating components. 2. Warranty Period—Entire system including materials and labor: One B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard fonn in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace coinponents on which finishes do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or worlananship within specified warranry period. Warranry does not include nonnal weathering. 1. Warranty Period: a. Ten years from date of Substantial Completion for Anodized finishes. SECTION 08411—ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES Page 2 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 PART2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Kawneer. 2. EFCO Corporation. 3. Vistawall Architectural Products; The Viistawall Group; a Bluescope Steel company. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. 1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209. 2. Extruded Bars,Rods,Profiles,and Tubes: ASTM B 221. 3. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M. 4. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10/A5.]OM. 2.3 GLAZING SYSTEMS A. Glazing: As specified in Division 8 Section "Cilazing' and Division 7 section "Composite Wall Panels". B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard corripression types; replaceable, molded or extruded, of profile and hardness reyuired to maintain watertight seal. C. Spacers, Setting Blocks, Side blocks, Gaskets, and Bond Breakers: Manufacturer's standard pennanent, nonmigrating types in hardness recommended by inanufacturer, compatible with sealants,and suitable for system perfonnance r�equirements D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Manufacturer's standarct TFE-fluorocarbon or polyethylene material to which sealants will not de�elop adhesion. 2.4 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter� of aluminum-framed systems, as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied, asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except contaiuing no asbestos; fo��nulated for 30-mil thickness per coat. C. Shims: appropriate compatible material, len�;th and hardness to suit the intended purpose. WOOD SHIMS WILL NOT BE ALLOWED. SECTION 08411—ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES Page 3 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-]6-13 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fonn or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing. B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding. C. After fabrication, clearly inark coinponents to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings. D. Fabricate coinponents to drain water passing joints and condensation and moisture occurring or migrating within the system to the exterior. E. Glazing Channels: Provide minimum clearances for thickness and type of glass indicated according to GANA's "Glazing Manual. 2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. High-Performance Organic Finish: 2-coat fluoropolymer finish coinplying with AAMA 2604 and containing not less than 50 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 1. Color: to match existing. B. Samples from production lots of finished material shall be tested in accordance with the following ASTM specifications: ASTM B137-95(2004), Coating Weights; ASTM B244- 97(2002), Coating Thickness; ASTM B 136-84(2003) Seal (Dye stain test), including nitric acid wash. Each rack load of processed material shall be tested for coating thickness and coating seal. During each production shift, a sample coupon shall be finished with a rack of production inaterial and shall be checked for coating weight. C. Maintain complete finish process records including certified inspection records for quality of finish. Provide copies of records to Architect upoon request. D. Repair of damage to finished surfaces by mechanical means (other than those specified) or by painting is not acceptable unless authorized in writing by architect. E. Finish surfaces shall be free from mechanical imperfections such as scratches, scrapes and dents. Finished surfaces shall be free from finish imperfections such as spots, stains and streaks. F. Material may be finished more than once provided that all specified requirements are satisfied. Material that has been finished twice and is still not acceptable shall be scrapped. SECTION 08411—ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES Page 4 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requireinents for installation tolerances and other conditions aff�ecting perfonnance of the Work. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Do not install damaged components. 3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration. 6. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated. B. Install components plumb and true in aligmnent with established lines and grades, and without warp or rack. C. Install glazing or composite wall panel as specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing." 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Desing Builder shall engage a qualified independent testing agency to witness field Quality-control testing. Water spray test (AAMA501.2-03) shall be basis of test. Aluminum entrance & storefront subcont:ractor shall furnish inanpower and equipinent necessary to field water test system. Assume test shall be mininum of 4 hours and a maximum of 8 hours. There shall not be unacceptable� water leakage as defined by this specification. Remedial measures are subject to approval by Design Builder and Testing Agency. Additional costs for retesting repaired/corrected installations will be the responsibility of the aluminum entrance and storefront installer B. Repair or remove work if test results and inspections indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements. C. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be perfonned to detennine compliance of replaced o�-additional work witYi specified requirements. D. Aluininum-framed assemblies will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION 08411 SECTION 08411—ALUMINUA7-FRAMED ENTRANCES Page 5 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 SECTION 08710—DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes items known commercially as finish or door hardware that are required for swing, sliding, and folding doors, except special types of unique hardware specified in the same sections as the doors and door fraines on which they are installed. B. This Section includes the following: 1. Lock cylinders and keys. 2. Lock and latch sets. (Cylindrical,Mortis�e and Dead). 3. Bolts. 4. Exit devices. 5. Push/pull units. 6. Hinges. 7. Closers. 8. Miscellaneous door control devices. (Holders and Stops). 9. Door Trim Units. (Plates). 10. Thresholds. 11. Weather-sri-ipping for exterior doors. 12. Sound and Light Seals. 13. Astragals or meeting seals on pairs of doors. C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and ��rames" for door silencers provided as part of hollow-metal fraines. 2. Division 8 Section "Flush Wood Doors" for factory pre-fitting and factory pre-machining of doors for door hardware. 3. Division 8 Section "Aluininuin Entrances" far entrance door hardware, except cylinders, and for door silencers provided as part of frames. 4. Division 8 Section "Automatic Door OpE.rators" for power door operators. 5. Division 16 Sections for connections to electrical power systein and for low-voltage wiring work. D. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following. Coordinating, purchasing, delivering,and scheduling remain requirements of this Section. 1. Cylinders for locks specified in other Se��tions such as,but not limited to entrance doors. DOOR HARDWARE 08710- 1 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical product data for each door hardware item, construction and installation details,material descriptions,dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each finish, color, and texture required for each type of door hardware indicated. C. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals. Include final hardware and keying schedule. D. Final Door Hardware Schedule: Coordinate the final door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. 1. Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door numbers as in the Contract Documents. 2. Content: Include the following information: a. Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, and material of each door and frame. b. Type,style, function,size,quantity,and finish of each door hardware item. c. Complete designations of every item required for each door or opening including name and manufacturer. d. Fastenings and other pertinent infonnation. e. Location of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. f. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. g. Mounting locations for door hardware. h. Door and frame sizes and materials. i. Keying information. 3. Subinittal Sequence: Submit final schedule along with essential infonnation listed below at the earliest possible date, particularly where prior acceptance of schedule is necessary ro facilitate the fabrication of other work that is critical in Project construction schedule. Subinit with the final door hardware schedule, Samples, Product Data, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, delivery schedules, and other information that has been completed and accepted,and is essential to the coordinated review of the schedule. 4. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Supplier, detailing Owner's final keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key set to unique door designations. E. Templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for the installation of door hardware. Check shop drawings of other work to confinn that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated reyuirements. DOOR HARDWARE 08710-2 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of hardware (latch and locksets,hinges, closers, etc.) from a single manufacturer B. Supplier Qualifications: A recognized architectural door hardware supplier, with warehousing facilities in the Project's vic:inity, that has a record of successful in-service performance for supplying door hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality to that indicated for this Project and that employs an experienced architectural hardware consultant(AHC) who is available to Owner, Architect, and Design-Builder Contractor, at reasonable times during the course of the Work, for consultation. 1. Supplier shall review opening requirements to reasonably ensure that all hardware is in compliance with applicable codes. C. Fire-Rated Openings: Provide door hardware for fire-rated openings that complies with NFPA Standard No. 80 and requirements of authorit;ies having jurisdiction. Provide only items of door hardware that are listed and are identical to products tested by UL, which comply with requirements of fire-rated door and door frame labels. 1.4 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to final hardware schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package. B. Packaging of door hai•dware is responsibility of supplier. As material is received by hardware supplier from various manufacburers, sort and repackage in containers clearly marked with appropriate hardware set number to match set numbers of approved hardware schedule. T�vo or more identical sets may be packed in same container. C. Inventory door hardware jointly with representatives of hardware supplier and hardware installer until each is satisfied that count is correct. D. Deliver individually packaged door hardware items promptly to place of installation (shop or Project site). ].5 MAINTENANCE A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furn.ish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware. DOOR HARDWARE 08710-3 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm, Washington 07-16-13 PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requireinents, provide products by manufacturers for various products listed below. An asterisk (*) following manufacturer's name designates manufacturer whose products are indicated in "Door, Frame and Hardware" Schedule. Such products are listed in the schedule by specific reference to manufacturer's catalog numbers. Except as otherwise indicated, products of equivalent quality, design, and function by other listed inanufacturers may be used, subject to approval of Architect and Design-Builder Contractor. B. All materials used in manufacture of hardware will be the best of respective kind and will be free of imperfections and flaws. C. Cylindrical Locksets: Falcon B-series w/IC core for Bestlocks. 1. Alternate Manufacturers: Owner Approved Equal. D. Dead Lock: Falcon B-series w/IC core for Bestlocks. 1. Alternate Manufacturers: Owner Approved Equal. E. Bolts: Rockwood*, Hager,or Ives�U. F. Exit Devices: Von Duprin 99 Series*. 1. Alternate Manufacturers: Yale or Corbin Russwin. G. Push/Pull: Hager,Rockwood,McKinney or Ives*. H. Hinges: Hager*, Stanley or McKinney. I. Pivots: Hager*, Stanley,McKinney. J. Closers(Door or Frame Mounted): LCN*. 4041 (non-handed) series heavy duty. 1. Alternate Manufacturers: Yale or Norton. K. Automatic Closers (concealed overhead): Horton Automatics"�. 1. Alternate Manufacturers: Stanley. L. Holders: LCN*, Rixson. M. Stops: Ives*, Rockwood,Hager or Glynn Johnson. N. Mop, Kick, and Annor Plates: Ives*,Rockwood, Hager. O. Thresholds: National Guard,Hager,Pemko* or Reese. DOOR HARDWARE 08710-4 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 P. Weather-stripping: National Guard,Hager or Pemko*. Q. Sound and Light Seals: National Guard,Hag;er or Pemko*. 2.2 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION A. Manufacturer's Name Plate: Do not use man�ufacturers'products that have manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location (omit reinovable nameplates)except in conjunction with required fire-rated labels and as otherwise acceptable to Architect. 1. Manufacturer's identification will be p�ermitted on rim of lock cylinders only. B. Base Metals: Produce hardware units of basic metal and forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition,temper, and hardness,but in no case of lesser (commercially recognized) quality than spe�cified for applicable hardware units by applicable ANSI/BHMA A156 series standards for each type of hardware item and with ANSUBHMA A156.18 for finish designations indicated. Do not furnish "optional" materials or forming methods for those indicated,except;as otherwise specified. C. Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, generally prepared for machine screw installation. D�� not provide hardware that has been prepared for self-tapping sheet metal screws,except as specifically indicated. D. Furnish screws for installation with each t►ardware item. Provide Phillips flat-head screws except as otherwise indicated. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match hardware finish or, if exposed in surfaces o:F other work, to match finish of this other work as closely as possible including"prepared for paint" surfaces to receive painted finish. E. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units that are exposed when door is closed except to the extent no standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do not use through-bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed in other work unless their use is the only means of reinforcing the work adequately to fasten the hardware securely. Where through-bolts are used as a means of reinforcing the work,provide sleeves for each through-bolt or use sex screw fasteners. 1. If all available »�anufacturers of a specific hardware item identify the only acceptable means of reinforcing the work adequately to fasten the hardware item securely is through the use of through-bolting,than the Architect shall be notified iminediately. 2.3 LOCK CYLINDERS AND KEYING A. General: Supplier to review with the Owner finalized keying requirements and provides final instructions in writing. Supplier shall provide the rype required (master, grandmaster, or great grandmaster) either new or integrated with the Owner's existing system. B. Equip locks with cylinders for interchangeable-core pin tumbler inserts. Furnish temporary inserts, if required by Design Builder Contractor, for the construction period, and remove these when directed. Furnish final cores and keys per approved keying schedule. DOOR HARDWARE 08710-5 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 C. Metals: Construct lock cylinder parts froin brass or bronze, stainless steel,or nickel silver. Key material shall be of nickel silver only. D. Key Quantity: Furnish 3 change keys for each lock, 5 inaster keys for each master system and grandinaster system. Furnish one extra blank for each lock. Existing keyway and grandinaster to match. Deliver keys to Owner. 2.4 LOCKS,LATCHES,AND BOLTS A. LOCKS/LATCHES: Provide appropriate lock/latch which satisfies both the ANSI function listed below and the reyuirements specified within this section. 1. The following schedule is to be used in conjunction with the "Door, Frame and Hardware Schedule" when deriving ANSI functions for all scheduled doors: Locks/Latches ANSI Function (Cylindrical) ANSI Function (Mortise) Storeroom F86 F07 Office F81 F04 Exit Latch F89 FOS Passage F75 FO1 Entrance F88 F09 Toilet F76 F22 Classroom F84 FOS Deadbolt E1141 NA B. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard wrought box strike for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame,finished to match hardware set,unless otherwise indicated. 1. Strikes shall be sized to prevent latch from striking frames during closing. 2. Provide extra long strike lips for locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim. 3. Provide recess type strikes for bolts locking into head frames. 4. Provide dust-proof strikes for foot bolts, except where special threshold construction provides nonrecessed strike for bolt. C. Lock Throw: Comply with UL requirements for throw of bolts and latch bolts on rated fire openings. 1. Provide 1/2-inch minimum throw of latch for other bored and preassembled types of locks. 2.5 FLUSH BOLTS A. Minimum of 1/2-inch-diameter rods of brass, bronze, or stainless steel with minimum 12-inch-long rod for doors up to 7'-0" in height. Provide longer rods as necessary for doors exceeding 7'-0" in height to maintain 6'-6" maximmn height to operating mechanism. Provide manual or automatic bolts as scheduled. DOOR HARDWARE 08710-6 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 B. Provide bolts at top and bottom of door where bolts are scheduled. Provide dust proof strikes at floor. 2.6 EXIT DEVICES A. Provide appropriate exit device that satisfiies both the ANSI function listed below and the requirements specified within this section. Exit devices on single leaf door openings shall be rim type; exit devices at double leaf(pair) openings shall be concealed vertical rod type,unless noted otherwise. 1. The following schedule is to be used in conjunction with the "Door,Frame and Hardware Schedule" when deriving ANSI functions for all scheduled doors: Exit Devices ANSI Function Exit Only O1 Pull 02 Key Lock OS Key Retract 03 Lever �g B. Bolts: Rockwood#555 with#570 dustproof'strike at floor. 2.7 PUSH/PULL UNITS A. Exposed Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners for installation, through-bolted for matched pairs but not for single units. 2.8 HINGES,BUTTS,AND PNOTS A. Templates: Except for hinges and pivots to�be installed entirely (both leaves) into wood doors and frames,provide only template-produced units. B. Screws: Provide Phillips flat head screws complying with the following requirements: 1. For metal doors and fraines install machine screws into drilled and tapped holes. 2. For wood doors and frames install wood screws. 3. For fire-rated ��ood doors install #12 x 1-1/4-inch, threaded-to-the-head steel wood screws. 4. Finish screw heads to match surface af hinges or pivots. C. Hinge Pins: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinge pins as follows: 1. Out-Swing Exterior poors: Nonremovable pins with security stud to prevent separation of closed position hinge if pin is remc�ved. 2. Out-Swing Corridor poors with Locks: Nonremovable pins. 3. Interior poors: Nonrising pins. 4. Tips: Flat button and matching plug,finished to match leaves. DOOR HARDWARE 08710-7 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm, Washington 07-16-13 5. Size of hinges shall be as follows: Door thickness/width Hin e height Hinge width 1-3/4 to 36" 4-1/2 4 or 4-1/2 1-3/4 over 36" 4-1/2 4-1/2 extra heavy duty, 1-3/4 over 48" 4-1/2 4-1/2 extra heavy duty, 6. Provide ball bearing type hinges on all doors with closers as indicated on the "Door, Frame and Hardware Schedule"unless hinges are scheduled as continuous. 7. Nuinber of hinges per door,provide quantities as follows: Door heiQht Hin es required To 60" 2 hinges 61" to 90" 3 hinges 91"to 120" 4 hinges 8. Provide continuously geared hinges as indicated on the "Door, Frame and Hardware Schedule". a. Hager-Roton continuously geared hinges. 9. Provide stainless steel hinges on all exterior doors. Provide brass core hinges for all interior doors,unless specified otherwise. D. Where projection of door trim is such as to prevent desired degree of opening, the proper hinge width shall be provided to allow the door to clear the trim. 29 CLOSERS AND DOOR CONTROL DEVICES A. Size of Units: Except as otherwise specifically indicated, comply with the manufacturer's recommendations for size of door control unit depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. l. Where parallel anns are indicated for closers, provide closer unit one size larger than recoinmended for use with standard anns. B. Access-Free Manual Closers: Provide adjustable units complying with ANSI A117.1 provisions for door opening force and delayed action closing. C. Closer/Operator: Provide appropriate closer/operator which satisfies both the descriptive listing in the "Door,Frame and Hardware Schedule" and the requirements specified within this section. D. Provide parallel ann closer on all push side closers. E. Provide closers, which limit closing speed such that, from an open position of 90 degrees, the door shall take at least 3 seconds to move to an open position of 12 degrees. DOOR HARDWARE 08710-S OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 F. Provide closers which allow interior swinging doors to be openable by a force of not more than 5 pounds applied to tl�e latch stile, except fire doors shall have minimum opening force allowable in accordance with NFPA 101,Lif�e Safety Code, Section 5-2.1.4.3. 2.10 STOPS A. Provide per the following: (See "Door,Frame and Hardware Schedule"). 1. Floor: Ives Dome doorstops and risers,, stop inodel numbers 436 and 438. a. Riser model numbers 435 and 437, provide stop or riser/stop as required for individual door number and floor finish. b. Provide appropriate carpet risers for floor stops in carpeted areas. 2. Wall: Ives mode1407 1/2 Wall Bumper. 3. Holder: Glynn Johnson 90 Series surf�ce mounted overhead doorstop&holder. 2.11 DOOR TRIM UNITS A. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners for door trim units (kick plates, edge trim and similar items)consisting of eitlher machine screws or self-tapping screws. B. Mop, Kick and Annor Plates: 18 gauge, stainless steel. (See Door, Frame and Hardware Opening Schedule for heights.) 1. Fabricate protection plates not more t}►an 1-1/2 inches less than door width on hinge side and not more than 1/2 inch less than door width on pull side by height indicated. C. Lock Protection Plate: Heavy Duty 1-1/2 inches x 6 inches, 12 gauge stainless steel protection plate. 2.12 THRESHOLDS A. General: Except as otherwise indicated,provide standard metal threshold unit of type, size, and profile as scheduled. B. Exterior Hinged Doors: Provide units not less than 5 inches wide, formed to accommodate change in floor elevation where indicated, fabricated to accommodate door hardware and to fit door frames. Provide units with rabbet nrofile, with gasket sri-ip of neoprene, rubber, or material as standard with inanufacturer. C. Rabbet Type Thresholds: Reese 483,National Guard Product 896,Pemko 2005,or Hager 520. D. Saddle Threshold: National Guard #425 or equal by Reese, Pemko, or Hager; ADA approved (maximum 1/2 inch height),5 inch wide saddle threshold with return closed ends. DOOR HARDWARE 08710-9 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm, Washington 07-16-13 E. Half Saddle Threshold: National Guard #350 or equal by Reese, Pemko, or Hager. Provide manufacturer's standard ADA compliant applied stop strip (maximuin 1/2 inch height),National Guard#700E or equal. 2.13 WEATHERSTRIPPING AND SEALS A. General: Provide continuous weather-stripping on all exterior doors. Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications. Provide smoke, light or sound seals on interior doors where indicated on schedule. B. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strip is easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer. C. Weather-stripping: Provide the following: 1. Pemko 345A at door bottoin seal. 2. Pemko 319 CN at head and jamb. 3. Pemko 303 AV as astragals for exterior double doors. D. Overhead Drip Guard: Provide at each hollow metal frame located at the exterior wall designated to receive weather-stripping, a full width, continuous, 1-1/2" x 2-1/2" Stainless steel drip mounted to the frame head. E. Sound and Light Seal: Provide the following: 1. Pemko 319 CN at head and jainb. 2. Pemko 4301 CRL semi-mortise at bottom. 3. Pemko 375 CR at meeting stiles. F. Form continuous sound and]ight seal around the entire door. 2.14 HARDWARE FINISHES A. All hardware shall have US26D (satin chromium) finish unless noted otherwise. Closers shall have matching paint finish. B. The designations used in schedules and elsewhere to indicate hardware finishes are the industry- recognized standard commercial finishes,except as otherwise noted. C. Provide matching finishes for hardware units at each door or opening to the greatest extent possible and except as otherwise indicated. Reduce difference in color and textures as much as cominercially possible where the base metal or metal fonning process is different for individual units of hardware exposed at the saine door or opening. In general, match items to the manufacturer's standard finish for the latch and lockset (or push/pull units if no latch/locksets) for color and texture. D. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified for the applicable units of hardware by referenced standards. DOOR HARDWARE 08710-10 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 E. Provide protective lacquer coating on all exposed hardware finishes of brass, bronze, and aluminum, except as otherwise indicated. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Mount hardware units at heights indicate�i in following applicable publications, except as specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations and except as otherwise directed by Architect. 1. "Recommended Locations for Builde:rs Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames" by the Door and Hardware Institute. 2. NWWDA Industry Standard I.S.1J, "Hardware Locations for Wood F1ush Doors," latest publication. B. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Where cutting and fitting;is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation or application of surface protection with finishing work specified in the Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrates involved. C. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. D. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors i�i accordance with ind.ustry standards. E. Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl-rubber or polyisobutylene mastic sealant. F. Weather-stripping and Seals: Coinply with rnanufacturer's instructions and recommendations to the extent installation requirements are not otherwise indicated. 32 ADJUSTING,CLEANING,AND DEMONSTRATING A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly or as intended for the application made. 1. Where door hardware is installed mor•e than one month priar to acceptance or occupancy of a space or area, return to the installation during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy and make final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door cantrol devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment. B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation. DOOR HARDWARE 08710- 11 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 C. Instruct Owner's personnel in the proper adjustment and maintenance of door hardware and hardware finishes. 3.3 DOOR,FRAME AND HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. Scheduled items are intended to illustrate the general function of the finish hardware. Hardware supplier shall make adjustments, additions or deletions as needed to provide hardware, which is totally coardinated and appropriate for the given door. 1. Refer to drawings for hardware schedule. END OF SECTION 08710 DOOR HARDWARE 08710- 12 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 SECTION 08713 -AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS PART 1 -GENERAL l.l SUMMARY A. Section includes low-energy door operators for swinging doors. Operator to be Push-n-go type that does not require push buttons. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For automatic door operators. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product certificates. B. Sample warranty. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance data. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCF, A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation and maintenance of units required for this Project. B. Certified Inspector Qualifications: Certified by the AAADM. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a testing agency, and marked for intended]c�cation and application. D. Exit-Door Requirements: Comply with require�ments of authorities having jurisdiction for doors with automatic door operators serving as a component of a required means of egress. E. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. SECTION 08713 -AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS Page 1 _ __ _. ___ __ _ _ OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of automatic door operators that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion. PART2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. DORMA Automatics. 2. Horton Automatics; a division of Overhead Door Corporation. 3. Stanley Access Technologies; Division of The Stanley Works. 4. Architect Approved Equal. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated, complying with standards indicated below: 1. Sheet: ASTM B 209. 2. Extrusions: ASTM B 221. B. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, non-staining, non- bleeding fasteners and accessories coinpatible with adjacent materials. 2.3 AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS,GENERAL A. General: Provide operators of size recommended by manufacturer for door size, weight, and movement; for condition of exposure; for long-tenn, maintenance-free operation under nonnal traffic load for type of occupancy indicated; and complying with UL 325. Coordinate operator mechanisms with door operation,hinges, and activation devices. 1. Emergency Breakaway: Where indicated for center-pivoted doors, provide emergency breakaway feature for reverse swing of doors. Equip system to discontinue power to automatic door operator when door is in emergency breakaway position, and to return to closed position after breakaway and automatically reset. 2. Wind Load: Provide door operators on exterior doors that will open and close doors and maintain them in fully closed position when subjected to wind loads indicated on the drawings. B. Electromechanical Operating System: Self-contained unit powered by permanent-magnet dc motor; with closing speed controlled mechanically by gear train and dynamically by braking SECTION 08713 -AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS Page 2 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 � action of electric motor. connections for power and activation-device wiring, and manual operation including spring closing when power is off. C. Hinges: See Division 08 Section "Door Hardware" for type of hinge for each door that door operator shall accommodate. D. Cover for Surface-Mounted Operators: Fabricated from 0.125-inch- thick extruded or fonned aluminum continuous over full width of operator-controlled doar opening; with enclosed end caps,provision for maintenance access,and fasteners concealed when door is in closed position. E. Brackets and Reinforceinents: Manufactur��r's standard, fabricated from aluminum with nonstaining,nonferrous shims for aligning system components. 2.4 LOW-ENERGY DOOR OPERATORS A. Standard: BHMA A156.19. B. Performance Requirements: 1. Opening Force if Power Fails: Not rnore than 15 ]bf required to release a latch if provided, not more than 30 lbf required to manually set door in motion, and not more than 15 lbf required to fully open door. 2. Entrapment Protection: Not more thar► 15 lbf required to prevent stopped door froin closing or opening. C. Configuration: Operator to control single swinging door. ]. Traffic Pattern: Two way. 2. Operator Mounting: Surface. 3. Push-n-Go operation with no push buttons. D. Operation: Power opening and power-assisted spring closing. Provide time delay for door to remain open before initiating closing cycle as required by BHMA A156.19. When not in automatic mode, door operator shall function .�s manual door closer, with or without electrical power. E. Operating System: Electromechanical. F. Microprocessor Control Unit: Solid-state controls. G. Features: 1. Adjustable opening and closing speed. 2. Adjustable opening closing force. 3. Adjustable backcheck. 4. Adjustable latch speed. 5. Adjustable hold-open time from zero to 30 seconds. 6. Adjustable time delay. 7. Adjustable acceleration. SECTION 08713 -AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS� Page 3 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 8. Obstruction recycle. 9. On-off/hold-open switch to control electric power to operator. H. Exposed Finish: Finish exposed components with Class I, clear anodized finish. 2.5 ACTIVATION DEVICES A. General: Provide devices in accordance with BHMA standards, for condition of exposure and for long-term, maintenance-free operation under nonnal traffic load for type of occupancy indicated. Coordinate devices with door operation and door operator mechanisms. B. Electrical Interlocks: Unless units are equipped with self-protecting devices or circuits,provide electrical interlocks to prevent activation of operator when door is locked, latched,or bolted. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Factory fabricate automatic door operators to comply with indicated standards. B. Fabricate exterior components to drain water passing joints and condensation and moisture occurring or migrating within operator enclosure to the exterior. C. Use concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use countersunk Phillips flat-head machine screws, finished to match operator. 2.7 ACCESSORIES A. Signage: As required by cited BHMA standard for the type of operator. 1. Application Process: Decals. 2. Provide sign inaterials with instructions for field application when operators are installed. 2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Finisb: to match adjacent existing aluminum framing. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine roughing-in for electrical systems to verify actual locations of power connections before automatic door operator installation. B. Verify that full-height finger guards are installed at each door with pivot hinges where door has a clearance at hinge side greater than 1/4 inch and less than 3/4 inch with door in any position. SECTION 08713 -AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS Page 4 -_ _ _. __ __ __ _ _ _. _ _ OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install complete automatic door operators according to manufacturer's written instructions, including activation devices, control wiring, and remote power units if any; connection to the buildin�'s power supply; and�.signage. B. Activation Devices: Install devices and wiring according to inanufacturer's written instructions and cited BHMA standard for type of operz�tor and direction of pedestrian travel. Connect device wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." C. Access-Control System: Connect operators to access-control system as specified in Section 11.1 "Security Equipment." D. Signage: Apply on both sides of each door ,as required by cited BHMA standard for type of door operator and direction of pedesri-ian travel. E. Adjusting: Adjust automatic door operators to function smoothly and for weathertight closure, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer; comply with requirements of applicable BHMA standards. l. Readjust automatic door operators after repeated operation of completed installation equivalent to three days'use by nonnal t�raffic(100 to 300 cycles). F. Demonstration: Engage a certified inspector to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain automatic door operators. END OF SECTION 087113 SECTION 08713 -AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORSI Page 5 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 SECTION 08800-GLAZING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: 1. Doors. 2. Interior borrowed lites. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated. B. Samples: (2 minimum) 12-inch- square, for each type of glass product indicated, other than monolithic clear float glass. G Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indic,ated on Drawings. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Submit to elastomeric glazing sealant manufacturers, for testing according to ASTM C 1087, samples of each glazing material type, tape sealant, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member that will contact or affect elastomeric glazing sealants: B. Glazing Publications: Comply with published:recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringe�nt requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing tenns not otherwise de�6ned in this Section or in referenced standards. 1. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units." 1.4 WARRANTY A. Provide written warranty agreeing to repair or replace defective materials and workmanship during warranty period. Defective material and workir�anship include,but are not lunited to: 1. Sealant (including structural silicone) loss of adhesion, loss of cohesion, cracking or discoloration. 2. disengagement of gaskets,weatherstrips or other glazing components. 3. Glass breakage including: secondary breakage caused by falling glass, spontaneous breakage of heat treated glass. SECTION 08800-GLAZING Page 1 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 B. Warranty does not include damage caused by vandalism, or natural conditions exceeding the performance requirements. Warranty and its enforcement shall not deprive Owner of other action,right or remedy. C. Warranty period for entire glass and glazing system shall be 1 year from the date of substantial completion. System warranty includes materials and labor. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requireinents apply to product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS A. Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent flat glass), Quality-Q3; of class indicated. B. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I (transparent flat glass); Quality-Q3; of class, kind,and condition indicated. 1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottoin edge of glass as installed,unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass in place of annealed float glass where needed to resist thennal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to comply with glass design requirements specified in Part 1 "Perfonnance Requirements"Article. 3. For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A. 4. For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other uncoated glass). 5. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) float glass in place of annealed or Kind HS (heat- strengthened)float glass where safety glass is indicated. 2.3 GLAZING GASKETS A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of material indicated below, complying with standards referenced with name of elastomer indicated below, and of profile and hardness required to inaintain watertight seal, but not less than Shore A hardness equal to 75 plus or minus 5 for dense and 60 plus or minus for hollow gaskets. l. Neoprene,ASTM C 864. 2. EPDM,ASTM C 864. SECTION 08800-GLAZING Page 2 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 0'7-16-13 B. Soft Coinpression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned gaskets of material indicated below; complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; and of profile and hardness required to inaintain watertight seal, but not less than Shore A hardness equal to 40 plus or minus 5. 1. Neoprene. 2. EPDM. 2.4 GLAZING SEALANTS A. General: Provide products of type indicated,complying with the following requirements: 1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, undf;r conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation. 3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from inanufacturer's full range. B. Elastoineric Glazing Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing se,alant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates. l. Sealants listed are acceptable subject to tests: a. Sealants required for non-structural exposed outdoor seals at penniters of�netal panels,and acceptable for other non-structural seals: 1) GE SilprufNB 2) Dow Corning 756 SMS b. Sealants acceptable for non-struc�tural seals at locations other thane perimeters fo metal panels: 1) GE Silpruf LM 2) Dow Corning 790,791,79S c. Sealants acceptable for shop applied structural seals: 1) GE U]traGlaze SSG4400 2) Dow Corning 983 d. Sealants acceptable for shop applied and field applied structural seals: 1) GE Silpruf 2) U1traGlaze SSG 4000 3) Dow Corning 795,995 2. Data sheets and sainples of other silicone sealants may be submitted for review and approval. 2.5 GLAZING TAPES A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based elastomeric tape with a solids content of 100 percent; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with SECTION 08800-GLAZING Page 3 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; packaged on rolls with a release paper backing; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below: 1. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure. 2. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure. B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; packaged on rolls with release liner protecting adhesive; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types: 1. Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant. 2. Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of liquid sealant. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape coinplying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing inaterials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Cleaners,Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. Minimum 4" length width eyual to glass width, secured against lateral migration. Shiins to be of same material as setting blocks. D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore,Type A durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. E. Edge and Side Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking), but not less than shore Type A durometer hardness of 55, plus or minus 5. Install side blocks at vertical edges between inid height and top of glass. F. Sealant back-up materials shall be polyethylene foam, urethane foam or extruded silicone as recominended by sealant manufacturer. Back-up shall not absorb water, and shall not emit gas, even if punctured. G. Perimeter Insulation far Fire-Resistive Glazing: Identical to product used in test asseinbly to obtain fire-resistance rating. 2.7 FABRICATION OF GLAZING LINITS A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements. SECTION 08800-GLAZING Page 4 _ _ _ OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 2.8 MONOLITHIC FLOAT-GLASS LJNITS A. Uncoated Clear Float-Glass Units: Class 1 (clear) Kind FT(fully tempered)float glass. PART3 -EXECUTION 3.1 GLAZING A. General: Comply with combined written iristructions of inanufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing inaterials,unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. 1. Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Drawings, provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation. 2. Protect glass edges from damage durin.g handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfectioms that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. 3. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants,as determined by preconstruction sealant-substrate testing. 4. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel be:ad. 5. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. 6. Provide spacers for glass lites where len�;th plus width is larger than 50 inches. 7. Provide edge blocking to prevent glass l�ites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass m,anufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications. B. Tape Glazing: Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. Install tapes continuously,but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do n��t stretch tapes to make them fit opening. 1. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills. 2. Place joints in tapes at corners of operiing with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compat;ible sealant approved by tape manufacturer. 3. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant. 4. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press finnly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets fonned an.d installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. C. Sealant Glazing(Wet): Install continuous sparers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel a�ld blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance. SECTION 08800-GLAZING Page 5 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 1. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. 2. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass. 3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to fraining held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer. B. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents,and vandalism,during construction period. END OF SECTION 08800 SECTION 08800-GLAZING Page 6 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 SECTION 09260- GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior gypsum wallboard. 2. Non-load-bearing steel framing. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 7 Section "Building Insulation° for thennal and sound attenuating insulation and vapor retarders installed in gypsum board assemblies. 2. Division 8 Section "Access Doors and Frames" for access doors/panels installed in gypsum wall/partition or ceiling constru�;tion. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Gypsum Board Terminology: Refer to ASTMI C 11 for definitions of tenns for gypsum board assemblies not defined in this Section or in other referenced standards. 1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENT'S A. Perfonnance Requirements: Fabricate and install systems as indicated but not less than that required to comply with ASTM C754 under the following conditions: 1. Gypsum board partitions: a. Standard systems: Maximum deflection of 1/240 of partition height. b. Systeins to receive glass mat a�id moisture / mold resistant gypsum board or cementitious backer board panel.s: Maximum deflection of 1/360 of partition height. 1) Provide 20 gauge or heaviex at walls to receive tile. c. At interior full height warehouse��artitions assuine a wind load pressure of 5 psf. 2. Interior suspended ceilings and soffits: Pvlaximum deflection of 1/360 of distance between supports. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicat�ed. SECTION 09260—GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Page 1 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 l.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single-Source Limitations: 1. Responsibility for Gypsum Wallboard Panel Products and Assembly components: a. Obtain each type of gypsum board and other panel products, and assembly components from a single gypsum board panel inanufacturer, or a company approved by gypsuin board panel manufacturer. 2. Responsibility for Non-Load Bearing Steel Framing: a. Obtain steel framing members for gypsum board and other wall panel product assemblies froin the same gypsum board panel manufacturer or from a single inanufacturer approved by gypsum board panel manufacturer. 3. Responsibility for Finishing Materials: a. Obtain finishing materials from the same gypsum board panel manufacturer or fro�n a single manufacturer approved by gypsum board panel manufacturer. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with fire-resistance ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. l. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory." C. Sound Transmission Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with STC ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by a yualified independent testing agency. 1. STC-Rated Assemblies: Indicated by design designations froin GA-600, "Fire Resistance Design Manual." 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface containination, corrosion,construction traffic,and other causes. Stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Prior to any installation work establish and maintain environmental conditions for installing and �nishing gypsum board panels and related products in full SECTION 09260—GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Page 2 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 compliance with ASTM C 840 requirememts or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations,whichever are more stringent. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.l MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Steel Framing and Furring: a. Clark Steel Framing Systems. b. Dietrich Industries, Inc. c. MarinoWare: Division of Ware Ind. d. Western Metal Lath& Steel Fram:ing Systems. e. An Architect approved equal. 2. Gypsum Board and Related Products: a. Teinple-Inland b. Certainteed. c. National Gypsum Company. d. United States Gypsum Co. e. An Architect approved equal. 2.2 STEEL SUSPENDED CEILING AND SOFFI'1��FRAMING A. Components, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. B. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641 i'A 641 M, Class 1 zir�c coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch- diamete�r wire. C. Hanger Attachments to Concrete: As follows: 1. Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching hanger wires and capable of sustaining;, without failure, a load equal to 5 tiines that imposed by construction as detennined by testing according to ASTM E 488 by a qualified independent testing agency. a. Type: Postinstalled,expansion anchor. D. Hangers: As follows: 1. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162-inch diameter. SECTION 09260—GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Page 3 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 E. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base metal thickness of 0.0538 inch , a ininimum 1/2-inch- wide flange, with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating. 1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches unless noted otherwise. F. Furring Channels (Furring Members): Commercial-steel sheet with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120),hot-dip galvanized, zinc coating. 1. Hat-Shaped,Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch deep. a. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch. G. Grid Suspension System for Interior Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock. l. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following: a. Annstrong World Industries,Inc.; Furring Systems/Drywall. b. Chicago Metallic Corporation. c. USG Interiors, Inc.; Drywall Suspension Systein. d. An Architect approved equal. 2.3 STEEL PARTITION AND SOFFIT FRAMING A. Components, General: As follows: 1. Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 2. Steel Sheet Components: Complying with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal and with ASTM A 653/A 653M,G40 (Z120),hot-dip galvanized zinc coating. B. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. 1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch, unless noted otherwise or as required by span. 2. Depth: As indicated. 3. Provide 0.0312 inch (20ga.) studs at all walls to receive cementitious backer board panels with tile,marble,stone finishes,or a skiin coat of veneer plaster finish. C. Deep-Leg Deflection Track: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch deep flanges. D. Proprietary Firestop Track: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated far studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following: a. Fire Trak Corp.; Fire Trak. b. Metal-Lite, Inc.;The System. c. An Architect approved eyual. SECTION 09260—GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Page 4 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 E. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet :for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. 1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.031�:inch. F. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: 0.0538-inch bare steel thickness, with minimum ]/2-inch-wide flange. 1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches. 2. Clip Angle: 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inch,0.068-i�ich-thick, galvanized steel. G. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645. 1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: As ind.icated. 2. Depth: As indicated. H. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.0538-inch bare steel thickness,with minimum 1/2-inch-wide flange. 1. Depth: As indicated. 2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum bare steel thickness of 0.0312 inch. 3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- diameter wire,or double strand of 0.0475-inch diameter wire. L Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. J. Flexible Track and Runners far Curved Partiti�ons: Segmented, hot dipped galvanized, 0.0312 inch (20ga.) steel track and runners with slideable strap,manufactured to allow curved partition framing to be installed with a miniinu�n field cu�tting and fitting. 1. Product: Subject to coinpliance with requireinents,provide one of the following: a. Flex-Ability Concept Co.; Flex-C Trac. b. An Architect approved equal. 2.4 INTERIOR GYPSUM WALLBOARD A. Panel Size: Provide in maximum]engths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and correspond with support system indicated. B. Gypsum Wallboard: AST'M C 36. 1. Regular Type: a. Thickness: As indicated. b. Long Edges: Tapered. c. Location: Vertical surfaces,unles,�otherwise indicated. SECTION 09260—GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Page 5 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 2. Type X: a. Thickness: As indicated b. Long Edges: Tapered. c. Location: Where required for fire-resistance-rated assembly. C. Sag-Resistant Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36,manufactured to have more sag resistance than regular-type gypsuin board. 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 3. Location: Ceiling surfaces. 2.5 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc. 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead: Use at all outside corners. b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound; use at exposed panel edges. c. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long leg receives joint compound; use where indicated. d. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound; use where indicated. e. Expansion(Control)Joint: Use where indicated. f. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges; use at curved openings. B. Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated. L Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: a. Fry Reglet Corp. b. Pittcon Industries. c. An Architect approved equal. 2. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of ASTM B 221,alloy 6063-T5. 3. Finish: Mill 2.6 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475. B. Joint Tape: SECTION 09260—GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Page 6 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 1. Interior Gypsuin Wallboard: Paper. 2. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wall��oard: For each coat use fonnulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas,use setting-rype taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embed�3ing tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges,use drying-type, all-purposc;compound. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat,use drying-type,all-purpose compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat,use drying-type,all-purpose compound. 5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish,use drying-type,all-purpose coinpound. D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: 1. Moisture and Mold-Resistant Interior Wall Panels: As recommended by manufacturer. 2.7 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirem.ents,provide one of the following: l. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Conrealed Joints: a. Pecora Corp.; AG20 FTR Acoustical and lnsulation Sealant. b. PL Acoustic Sealant; ChemRex, Inc.; Contech Brands. c. United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. d. An Architect approved equal. 2.8 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate. 1. Use adhesives that have a VOC content: of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24)�. C. Spot Grout: ASTM C 475, setting-type joint a�mpound recominended for spot-grouting hollow metal door frames. D. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002,unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick. 2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer. E. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: SECTION 09260—GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Page 7 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 1. Foain Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size. F. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation." PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates,with Installer present,and including welded hollow-inetal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for coinpliance with requireinents and other conditions affecting perfonnance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 32 PREPARATION A. Suspended Ceilings: Coordinate installation of ceiling suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive ceiling hangers at spacing required to support ceilings and that hangers will develop their full strength. 1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devises indicated to other trades for installation in advance of time needed for coordination and construction. 3.3 1NSTALLING STEEL FRAMING,GENERAL A. Installation Standards: ASTM C 754, and ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation. B. Install supple�nentary framing, blocking, and bracing at tenninations in gypsuin board assemblies to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or siinilar construction. Comply with details indicated and with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations or, if none available, with United States Gypsum's "Gypsum Construction Handbook." C. Isolate steel fraining from building structure at locations indicated to prevent transfer of]oading imposed by structural movement. ]. Isolate ceiling assemblies where fliey abut or are penetrated by building structure. 2. Isolate partition framing and wall furring where it abuts structure, except at floor. Install slip-type joints at head of assemblies that avoid axial loading of assembly and laterally support assembly. a. Use deep-leg deflection track where indicated. b. Use proprietary deflection track where indicated. SECTION 09260—GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES page g OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,W ashington 07-16-13 D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with steel framing or furring members. Frame both sides of joints independently. 3.4 INSTALLING STEEL SUSPENDED CEILII'JG AND SOFFIT FRAMING A. Suspend ceiling hangers from building structure as follows: 1. Install hangers plu�nb and free from co�ntact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers only where required to miss ot�structions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing,countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width or location of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum interfere with the location of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install suppleinental suspension members and hangers in fonn of trapezes or equivalent devices. Provide the minimum size supplemental structural suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads in strict accordance with performance limits established by referenced standards. 3. Secure wire hangers by looping and wire-tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eyescrews, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 4. Secure all other hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eyescrews, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 5. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that extend through fortr�s. 6. Do not attach hangers to steel roof decic or steel deck tabs. 7. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts,pipes, or conduit. 8. Attach hangers to structural members, or supplemental suspension and hanger members ONLY. B. Installation Tolerances: Install steel fraining components for suspended ceilings so inembers for panel attachment are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member and transversely between parallel members. C. Sway-brace suspended steel framing with hangers used for support. D. Wire-tie or clip furring channels to suppoi�ts, as required to coinply with requirements for assemblies indicated. E. Install suspended steel fraining components in sizes and spacings indicated on the Drawings, but not less than that required by the referenced steel fraining and installation standards and as listed below. 1. Hangers: 48 inches o.c. 2. Carrying Channels(Main Runners): 4�B inches o.c. 3. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 16 inches o.c. SECTION 09260—GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Page 9 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 F. Grid Suspension System: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension system meets vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track. 3.5 INSTALLING STEEL PARTITION AND SOFFIT FRAMING A. Install tracks (runners)at floors,ceilings, and structural walls and columns where gypsuin board assemblies abut other construction. 1. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install foam-gasket isolation strip between studs and wall. B. Installation Tolerance: Install each steel framing and furring member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by the faces of adjacent framing. C. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling to provide support for gypsum board. 1. Cut studs 1/2 inch short of full height to provide perimeter relief. 2. For fire-resistance-rated and STGrated partitions that extend to the underside of floor/roof slabs and decks or other continuous solid-structure surfaces to obtain ratings, install framing around structural and other members extending below floor/roof slabs and decks, as needed to support gypsum board closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. 3. Tenninate partition framing at suspended ceilings where indicated. D. Install steel studs and furring at the following spacings: 1. Single-Layer Construction: 16 inches o.c.,unless otherwise indicated. 2. Multilayer Construction: 16 inches o.c.,unless otherwise indicated. 3. Cementitious Backer Units: 16 inches o.c.,unless otherwise indicated. E. Install steel studs so flanges point in the same direction and leading edge or end of each panel can be attached to open(unsupported)edges of stud flanges first. F. Fraine door openings to comply with GA-600 and with gypsum board manufacturer's applicable written recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (far cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. L Install two studs at each jamb,unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint. 3. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of floor or roof structure above. SECTION 09260—GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES -.. Page 10 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 G. Frame openings other dian door openings the same as required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. H. Polyethylene Vapor Retarder: Install to comply with requirements specified in Division 7 Section"Building Insulation." 3.6 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS,GENERAL A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: ASTM C 840 and GA-216. B. Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. C. Install gypsum panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place. D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intennediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. E. Attach gypsum panels to steel studs so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported)edges of stud flanges first. F. Spot grout hollow metal door frames for sol:id-core wood doors, hollow metal doors, and doors over 32 inches wide. Apply spot grout at each jamb anchor clip and immediately insert gypsuin panels into frames. G. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts. Install gypsum panels so that joints occur over opening a minimum oi'1/3 points from corner. Avoid horizontal joints at opening corners whenever possible. H. Fonn control and expansion joints with spacs between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. I. Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings,etc.), except in chases braced intern,ally. 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings,coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts,pipes,and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect open concrete coffers, concrete joists, and other structural members projecting below underside �of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by coffers,joists, arid other structural inembers; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- wide joints to install sealant. J. Isolate perimeter of non-load-bearing gypsiim board partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these ]ocations, and trim edges with U-bead SECTION 09260—GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Page 11 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 edge trim where edges of gypsum panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. K. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control and expansion joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through gypsum board asseinblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. L. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and finishing standard and manufacturer's written recommendations. 1. Space screws a maximum of 12 inches o.c. for vertical applications. M. Space fasteners in panels that are tile substrates a maximum of 8 inches o.c. 3.7 PANEL APPLICATION METHODS A. Single-Layer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to the greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing,unless otherwise indicated. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing,unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly,and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of board. b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. B. Multilayer Application on Ceilings: Apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members and offset face-layer joints 1 framing member, 16 inches minimum, from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire- resistance-rated asseinbly. C. Multilayer Application on Partitions/Walls: Apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions. D. Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. E. Multilayer Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws. F. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate (other than studs,joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum SECTION 09260—GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Page 12 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 board manufacturer's written recominendatio�ns and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set. 3.8 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, a�ttach trim according to inanufacturer's written instructions. B. Control Joints: Install control joints accord�ing to ASTM C 840, at maximum spacings listed below, and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect]. 1. Maximum distance between wall/partition joints shall be 30'-0°unless noted otherwise. 2. Maximum distance in ceiling joints shall be 30'-0"unless noted otherwise. 3.9 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interiior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, �except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape. D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish �,�anels to levels indicated below, according to ASTM C 840, for locations indicated: 1. Level 1: Embed tape at joints in ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated, unless a higher level of finish is required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies and sound-rated assemblies. 2. Level 2: Embed tape and apply sepa�rate first coat of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges where panels are substrate for tile and where indicated 3. Level 3: Einbed tape and apply separate first and fill (second) coats of joint coinpound to tape,fasteners, and trim flanges. 4. Leve14: Embed tape and apply sepa�•ate first, fill (second), and finish (third and fourth) coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges at panel surfaces that will be exposed to view,unless otherwise indiicated. 5. Level 5: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill (second), and finish (third, fourth and fifth) coats of joi�nt compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges, and apply skim coat of joint compound over entire surface at�ceilings and soffits . E. Moisture and Mold-Resistant Interior Wall Panels: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions. F. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish accordin,g to manufacturer's written instructions. SECTION 09260—GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Page 13 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 3.11 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Promptly remove any residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in manner acceptable to Installer, that ensure gypsum board assemblies are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 09260 SECTION 09260—GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Page 14 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 SECTION 09310- CERAMIC TIL.E PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Quarry tile. 2. Crack-suppression meinbrane for thin-set tile installations. 3. Metal edge strips installed as part of tile installations. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Static Coefficient of Friction: For tile installed on level walkway surfaces, provide products with a minimum value of 0.6,as determined by testing identical products per ASTM C 1028. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. B. Samples: 1. Full-size units of each type, compositi��n, color, and finish of tile, and each type of trim and accessory for each color and finish required. 2. Full range of standard color grout samp�les. 3. Metal edge strips each in 6-inch length.;. C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that the products furnished comply with requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed tile installations for a minimum of five years similar in mat��rial, design and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain all tile o1'same type and color ar finish from one source or producer. 1. Obtain tile from same production run and of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area. C. Source Limitations far Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a unifonn yuality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from a single manufacturer and each aggregate from one source or producer. SECTION 09310-CERAMIC TILE Page 1 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 D. Source Liinitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this Section through one source from a single manufacturer for each product: 1. Waterproofing. 2. Joint sealants. 3. Metal edge strips. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirement in ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile packages. B. Prevent damage or contamination to materials by water, freezing, foreign matter, and other causes. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are �naintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and inanufacturer's written instructions. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 2 percent of amount installed, for each type,composition, color,pattern,and size indicated. PART2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Tile Product Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products as shown on the drawings. B. In other Part 2 articles wbere titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: L Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1, "Specifications for Ceramic Tile," for types,compositions, and other characteristics indicated. SECTION 09310-CERAMIC TILE Page 2 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Mate�rials: Provide materials complying with ANSI standards referenced in "Setting and Groutin€;Materials" Article. C. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Where mam.zfacturer's standard products are indicated for tile, grout, and other products requiring selectic�n of colors, surface textures, patterns, and other appearance characteristics, provide specific ��roducts or materials complying with the following requirements: l. As shown on the drawings. 2. Provide tile trim and accessories that match color and finish of adjoining flat tile. D. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges selected during Sample submittals, blend tile in factory and packagE; so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from other pacicages and match approved Samples. 2.3 TILE PRODUCTS A. Provide products of types and sizes as shown on the drawings. B. Tile Trim Units: Provide tile trim units witli inatching characteristics of adjoining flat tile and coordinated with sizes and coursing where applicable. 2.4 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Waterproofing and Crack-Suppression Membranes for Thin-Set Tile Installations: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with ANSI A118.10, selected from the following. 1. Chlorinated-Polyethylene-Sheet Product (For Crack Suppression): Nonplasticized, chlorinated polyethylene faced on both sides with high strength, nonwoven polyester fabric, for adhering to latex-portland cement mortar; 60 inches wide by 0.030-inch nominal thickness. a. Product: Noble Company(The);Nobleseal TS. b. An Architect approved equal. 2.5 SETTING AND GROUTING MATERIALS A. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar(Thin Set): ANSI A118.4. ]. Prepackaged dry-mortar inix coinbine�d with liquid-latex additive. 2. For wall applications,provide nonsagging mortar. B. Polymer-Modified Tile Grout (For Ceramic Floor and Wall Tile): ANSI Al 18.7, color as indicated on the drawings. 1. Polymer Type: -latex form for additic�n to prepackaged dry-grout mix. a. Unsanded grout mixture for joints 1/8 inch and narrower. SECTION 09310-CERAMIC TILE Page 3 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 b. Sanded grout mixture for joints 1/8 inch and wider. C. Polymer-Modified Un-sanded Epoxy Tile Grout (For Porcelain Tile): Color as indicated on the drawings. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials. B. Metal Edge Strips: Angle ar L-shape, stainless steel; ASTM A 666, 300 Series exposed-edge material. C. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.] EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove coatings,including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone,that are incompatible with tile-setting materials. B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions with trowelable leveling and patching compound according to tile-setting material manufacturer's written instructions. C. Remove protrusions,bumps,and ridges by sanding or grinding. D. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, use factory blended tile or blend tiles at Project site before installing. E. Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type or needed to prevent grout from staining ar adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat them with continuous film of temporary protective coating,taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces. SECTION 09310-CERAMIC TILE Page 4 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,W ashington 07-16-13 3.3 INSTALLATION,GENERAL A. ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply v��ith parts of ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for Installation of Cerainic Tile" that apply to types of setting and grouting materials and to methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules. B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation." Comply with TCA installation methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules. 1. Refer to TCA EJ-]71 for installation methods and guidelines of Control,Contraction and Isolation Joints. C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions, unless otlierwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions,edges,and corners without disnlpting pattern or joint alignments. D. Accurately fonn intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Grind cut edges of tile abutting triin, finish, or built-in items. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or or� each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths,unless otherwise indicated. F. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints amd other sealant-filled joints during installation of setting materials,mortar beds, and tile. Do n��t saw-cut joints after installing tiles. L Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates. 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requireinents in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." G. Grout tile to comply with requirements of ANSI A108.10,unless otherwise indicated. 1. For ceramic tile grouts (sand-portland cement; dry-set, commercial portland cement; and latex-portland cement grouts),comply with ANSI A108.10. H. Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A108.13 and waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions to produce waterproof inemb�rane of uniform thickness bonded securely to substrate. 1. Do not install tile over waterproofing; until waterproofing has cured and been tested to detennine that it is watertight. L Install crack isolation membranes to c�omply with ANSI A108.13 and waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions to produce waterproof inembrane of unifonn thickness bonded securely to substrate. 1. Do not install tile over crack isolation membrane until membrane has cured fully and has developed a secure bond to substrate. SECTION 09310-CERAMIC "CILE Page 5 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 J. For installations indicated below, follow procedures in ANSI A108 Series tile installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage. 1. Tile floors composed of tiles 8 by 8 inches or larger. 2. Tile floors composed of rib-backed tiles. K. Install tile on floors with the following joint widths: 1. Quarry Tile: 1/4 inch. 2. Ceramic Tile at restrooms: 1/8 inch. L. Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated or where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet,wood,or other flooring that finishes flush with top of tile. M. Apply grout sealer to cementitious grout joints in tile floors according to grout-sealer manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints,remove excess sealer and sealer that has gotten on tile faces by wiping with soft cloth. N. Install tile on walls with the following joint widths: 1. Quarry Tile: 1/4 inch. 2. Ceramic Tile at restrooms: 1/8 inch or integral spacers. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. 1. Remove latex portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile accarding to tile and grout manufacturer's written instructions,but no sooner than 10 days after installation. 3. Unglazed tile may be cleaned with sulpham�ic acid solutions, only when permitted by tile and grout »ta�7ufacturer's w��itten instructio�s, bul i�o sooi�er zl�af� 10 days after installation. 4. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces, cast iron and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to the ,manufacturer and installer, and that insures installed tile is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 1. When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to coinpleted tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage,and wear. C. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is completed. D. Before final inspection,remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces. SECTION 09310-CERAMIC TILE Page 6 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 END OF SECTION 09310 SECTION 09310-CERAMIC TILE page� OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 SECTION 09511 -ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 7 Section "Building Insulation". 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicat��d. B. Samples: For each acoustical panel, for each concealed and exposed suspension system member and for each exposed color,texture and finish. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Acoustical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing laboratory or an NVLAP- accredited laboratory. B. Source Li�nitation: Obtain each type of aco�ustical ceiling panel and supporting suspension system through one source from a single manuiacturer. C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: 1. Fire-Resistance Characteristics: Where indicated, provide acoustical panel ceilings identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to autborities having jurisdiction. a. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another testing and inspecting agency. b. Tdentify materials with appropria�te inarkings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Acoustical panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials,�vhen tested per ASTM E 84. a. Su►oke-Developed Index: 450 or less. D. Seismic Standard: Comply with the following: l. Standard for Ceiling Suspension Systeans Requiring Seismic Restraint: Comply with ASTM E 580. SECTION 09511 —ACOU5TICAL PANEL CEILINGS Page 1 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 2. CISCA's Recoinmendations for Acoustical Ceilings: Comply with CISCA's "Recommendations for Direct-Hung Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings--Seismic Zones 0-2." 3. IBC Category: D. E. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination,and other causes. B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof,wet work in spaces is complete and dry,work above ceilings is complete, and ambient teinperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including, as applicable, light fixtures,HVAC equipment,fire-suppression systein, and partition assemblies. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furc�ish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed. PART2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS, GENERAL A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances,unless otherwise indicated. SECTION 09511—ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS Page 2 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 B. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635. C. Attachinent Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table l, "Direct Hung,"unless otherwise indicated. Coi�nply with seismic design requirements. l. Anchors in Concrete: Expansion anchors fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with holes or loops for attaching hangers of rype indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 or ASTM E 1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. 2. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hangers of type iridicated, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 tiines that imposed by ceiling construction, as detennined by testing per ASTM E 1190,conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. D. Wire Hangers,Braces, and Ties: Zinc-coated carbon-steel wire; ASTM A 641/A 641M,Class 1 zinc coating, soft teinper. 1. Zino-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less tha�n yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inch- diameter wire. E. Seismic perimeter stabilizer bars, seismic stnits, and seismic clips: Manufacturer's standard components designed to accommodate seismic forces, and spaced to secure acoustical panels in place. F. Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design requirements; fonned from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension systein runners. 2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS FOR ACOUSTICAI,PANEL CEILING A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirem�ents,provide one of the following: 1. Armstrong World lndustries, Inc.. B. Products: l. See Rooin Finish Schedule on Drawings for specific products. C. Color: As indicated on Drawings. D. Thickness As indicated on Drawings. SECTION 09511 —ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILIN(:S Page 3 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 E. Modular Size: As indicated on Drawings. F. Access Panel Units: Where required, provide specifically marked access panel units identified by manufacturer's standard non-obtrusive markers for upward,access through each panel unit. 2.3 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING A. Products: Subject to compliance with reyuirements,provide one of the following: 1. Armsri-ong World Industries,Inc. 2. Chicago Metallic Corporation. 3. An Architect approved equal. B. Products: 1. See Room Finish Schedule on Drawings for specific products. C. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners. 1. Provide manufacturer's standard edge moldings that fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems indicated and that match width and configuration of exposed runners, unless otherwise indicated. Include all necessary splice plates, corner pieces, and miscellaneous attachments and other clips. 2. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required to fit penetration exactly. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with reyuirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 1NSTALLATION A. Comply with ASTM C 636 and seismic design requirements indicated, per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook." B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders. SECTION 09511 —ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS Page 4 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 1. Reference and coordinate layout with refllected ceiling plans. C. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members, plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal force�o by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers, use trapezes or equivalent devices. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires. 1. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect liangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age,corrosion,or elevated temperatures. 2. Do not support ceilings directly from pennanent metal fonns or floor deck; anchor into concrete slabs. 3. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs or to steel roof deck. 4. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers,unless otherwise indicated;pro��ide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member. D. Install edge moldings and triin of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area, at penetrations and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not inore than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a �[olerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and connect securely. ]. Do not use exposed fasteners,including pop rivets, on moldings and trim. E. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented,bent,or kinked me�mbers. F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut par,�els at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit. l. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows: a. Install panels with pattern running in one direction parallel to long axis of space. 2. For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of suspension system runners and moldings. 3. For reveal-edged panels on suspension system runners, install panels with bottom of reveal in finn contac�t with top surface of'runner flanges. 4. Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel manufacturer. 5. Install hold-down clips in areas indicated, in areas required by authorities having jurisdiction, and for fire-resistance ratings; space as recommended by panel inanufacturer's written instructions,unless otherwise indicated. 6. Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts to comply with requirements indicated for fire- resistance-rated assembly. SECTION 09511 —ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS Page 5 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 3.3 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish dainage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to pennanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION 09511 SECTION 09511—ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS Page 6 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 SECTION 09651 - RESILIENT FLOOR TILE PART 1 -GENERAL l.l SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Vinyl Composition Tile B. Related Sections Include the Following: 1. Division 9 Section "Resilient Wall Base and Accessories" for resilient base, reducer strips,and other accessories installed witlh resilient floor coverings. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicatf;d. B. Samples: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required. C. Maintenance data: For each type of resilient pr�oduct to be included in maintenance inanuals. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced�installer to perfonn work of this Section who has specialized in installing resilient products similar to those required for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type, color, and pattern of product specified from one source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the Work. A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As detennined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I,not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened cartons and containers, each bearing names of product and inanufa<;turer, Project identification, and shipping and handling instructions B. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer,but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. SECTION 09651—RESILIENT FLOOR TILE Page 1 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 1. Store floor tiles on flat surfaces. C. Move products into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours before installation, unless longer conditioning period is recoimnended in writing by manufacturer. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive floor tile for at least 48 hours before installation, during installation and 48 hours after installation, unless manufacturer's written recommendations specify longer periods. B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer,but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F. C. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation, and for a period of time after installation is complete as recommended in writing by manufacturer, but not less than 48 hours after floor tile installation. D. Install floor tile and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. E. Do not install floor tile and accessories over concrete slabs or other surfaces until concrete has cured and is sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive, as determined by flooring manufacturer's written recommended bond and moisture test. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 VINYL COMPOSITION FLOOR TILE A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide product indicated on the drawings. B. Tile Standard: ASTM F 1700-OR. C. Wearing Surface: As indicated on the drawings. D. Thickness: 4 mm. E. Size: 6 by 36 inch plank. F. Colors and Patterns: as indicated on the drawings. 2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulio-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated. SECTION 09651 —RESILIENT FLOOR TILE Page 2 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recominended by manufacturer to suit floor tile and substrate conditions indicated. 1. Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D(EPA Method 24): a. Vinyl Composition Floor Tile Adl�esives: Not more than 50 g/L. C. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminuin with rnill finish of width shown, of height required to protect exposed edges of tiles, and in maximum available lengths to minimize running joints. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, fox compliance with requirements for installation tolerances,maximum moisture content and othe;r conditions affecting perfonnance of the Work. 1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other reyuirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers,and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or siliconf;, using mechanical methods recoinmended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. 3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perfor7n tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. D. Move resilient products a�1d installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. 1. Do not install floor tiles until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed. E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be co�vered by resilient products immediately before installation. SECTION 09651 —RESILIENT FLOOR TILE Page 3 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 i 3.3 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile. B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of eyual width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter. C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or defonned tiles. D. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, door frames, thresholds and nosings. E. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Unless otherwise indicated, extend floor tiles to center of door openings. F. Maintain reference inarkers, holes, and openings that are in place or inarked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. G. Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks,and other surface imperfections. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor tile. B. Perfonn the following operations iminediately after completing floor tile installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Do not wash surfaces until after time period recommended by manufacturer. 4. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during reinainder of construction period. D. Cover resilient products installed on horizontal surfaces with undyed, untreated building paper until Substantial Completion. E. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over surfaces. Place hardboard or plywood panels over flooring and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll objects over panels without moving panels. END OF SECTION 09651 SECTION 09651 —RESILIENT FLOOR TILE Page 4 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 SECTION 09653 - RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Resilient base. 2. Resilient molding accessories. B. Related Sections Include the Following: ]. Division 9 Section "Resilient Floor Tile for resilient floor tile." 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicat�ed. B. Samples: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard-size Samples but not less than 12 inches long,of each resilient prodwct color,texture, and pattern required. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCF; A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As deterrnined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1. Critical Radiant Flua Classification: Class I,not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm. 1.4 DELNERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by�nanufacturer,but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain ainbient teinperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 9S deg F , in spaces to receive resilient products for at least 48 hours before installation, d�aring installation and 48� hours after installation, unless manufacturer's written recommendations specify longer periods. B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambie,nt temperatures witbin range recommended by manufacturer,but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F . C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. SECTION 09653—RESILIENT V1'ALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES Page 1 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, of each type,color,pattern, and size of resilient product installed. 2. Coordinate delivery of extra inaterials with owner. PART2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 RESILIENT WALL BASE A. Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861. 1. Material Requirement: Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset) or Type TP (rubber, thennoplastic). 2. Manufacturing Method: Group I (solid,homogeneous). 3. Style: Cove B. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch. C. Height: As indicated on Drawings. D. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's maximum standard length. E. Outside Corners: Job fonned. F. Inside Corners: Job formed. G. Finish: As indicated on Drawings. H. Colors and Patterns: As indicated on Drawings. 2.2 RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORY A. Description: Reducer strip for resilient floor covering, Joiner for tile and carpet and Transition strips . B. Material: Rubber. C. Profile and Dimensions: As indicated on drawings. D. Colors and Patterns: As indicated on drawings. SECTION 09653—RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES Page 2 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Coinpounds: Latex-modified, portland ceinent based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. 1. Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D(EPA Method 24): a. Cove Base Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L. b. Rubber Floor Adhesives: Not more than 60 g/L. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsa�tisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to inanufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Concrete Substrates for Resilient Stair Treads and Accessories: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers,and hardeners. 2. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perfo�Yn tests recommended by manufacturer. 3. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recomir►ended by manufacturer. 4. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. C. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using meclianical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. D. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove buinps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. SECTION 09653—RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES Page 3 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 E. Move resilient products and installation inaterials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. 1. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. F. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. 3.3 RESILIENT WALL BASE INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base. B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns,pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooins and areas where base is required. C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout ]ength of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation. F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with inanufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. G. Job-Fonned Corners: 1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form without producing discoloration(whitening) at bends. 2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of inaximum lengths possible. 3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories. B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor covering that would otherwise be exposed. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient products. B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. SECTION 09653—RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES Page 4 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughlv. 3. Do not wash surfaces until after time pf,riod recommended by inanufacturer. 4. Damp-mop or wash surfaces to remove marks and soil. C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods recommended in writing by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 09653 SECTION 09653—RESILIENT�ti'ALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES Page 5 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-]6-13 SECTION 09681 - CARPET TILE PART 1 -GENERAL l.l SUMMARY A. This Section includes modular,tufted carpet til�e. • B. Related Sections include the following: ]. Division 9 Section "Resilient Wall Base and Accessories" for resilient wall base and accessories installed with carpet tile. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade r��sistance. Include installation recommendations for each type of substrate. B. Samples: For each color and texture required. l. Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample. 2. Exposed Edge,Transition, and other Accessory Stripping: 12-inch-long Samples. C. Product Schedule: For carpet tile. Use same room and product designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. D. Maintenance data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Carpet tile inanufacturer shall have no less than five years of successful experience producing carpet tile products meeting or exceeding the level of quality identified for the type of carpet tile products ��,pecified in this document; and whose published product literature clearly indicates compli��nce of product requirements listed in this specification section. B. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the Floor Covering Installation Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program requirements. C. Carpet tile installations shall comply with CRI 104-2002, "Standard for Installation of Commercial Carpet". D. Carpet Tile Carton Marking: Mark each carpet tile carton according to style,color, Pattern, dye lot,and quantity. Within each continuous carpst area,install carpet from same dye lot. SECTION 09681—CARPET TILE Page 1 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 E. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products with the critical radiant flux classification indicated in Part 2, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 648 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Coinply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handlin�." B. Deliver carpet tile in sealed protective cartons. C. Materials shall be stored in an enclosed and dry area protected from damage and soiling. All carpet tile shall be sealed and enclosed in original boxes complete with product and color identification on each box. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.2, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity" and Section 7.12, "Ventilation." B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet tiles until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. C. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recoinmended by carpet tile manufacturer, but not less than 65 deg F or more than 95 deg F and the relative humidity between 10% and 65%, in spaces to receive carpet tile far at least 48 hours before installation, during installation and 72 hours after installation, unless manufacturer's written recommendations specify longer periods. The slab temperature should not be less than 65 deg F. D. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer,but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F . E. Do not install carpet tiles over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. F. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet tiles, install carpet tiles befare installing these items. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer's standard fonn in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, loss of tuft bind strength, dimensional stability, excess static discharge, and delamination. SECTION 09681—CARPET TILE Page 2 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 5 pe�rcent of amount installed for each type indicated. 2. Deliver specified overrun extra materials and usable scraps of carpet tile to owner's designated storage space,properly packaged (boxed) and identified. PART2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 CARPET TILE A. Products: Subject to compliance with requireinents, provide products as shown on the Drawings L Colors and Patterns: As shown on Drawings and listed in Finish Schedule. B. Carpet Construction: All yarn and carpet materials shall be manufacturer's first quality and 100- percentrecyclable. C. Backing Systein: Manufacturer's standard materials and as follows: 1. All carpet tile shall have inoisture guard backing system to allow for installation on substrates that have vapor transmission rates up to 7 lbs per 1000 sq. ft. per 24 hour period. D. Size: As indicated on the drawings E. Applied Soil-Resistance 7'reatment: Manufach�rer's standard material. F. Performance Characteristics: As follows: L Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cin, per ASTM E648. 2. Electrostatic Propensity: Less than 3 kV'per AATCC 134. 2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based fonnulation provided or recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer, and is compatible with carpet adhesives and any curing/sealing compound used on concrete slab. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining, pressure-sensitive type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile and is recominended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable pressure sensitive installations. SECTION 09681—CARPET TILE Page 3 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkaliniry range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet tile perfonnance. Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and potential defects. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected, and necessary test results are acceptable. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.3, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet tile installation. B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. Verify that slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. 2. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incoinpatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. C. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks,holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes and depressions 1/8 inch wide or wider and protrusions more than 1/32 inch, unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions. D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered iinmediately before installing carpet tile. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Coinply with CRI 104, Section 14, "Carpet Modules," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Installation Method: Glue down; install every tile with full-spread, releasable, pressure- sensitive adhesive. C. Maintain dye lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area. D. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, pennanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. SECTION 09681—CARPET TILE Page 4 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 E. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions,removable flanges,alcoves,and similar openings. F. Install pattern as indicated on drawings. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perfonn the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile: 1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealt,r, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. 2. Remove yarns that protrude froin carpet tile surface. 3. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element. B. Protect installed carpet tile to comply wi�th CRI 104, Section 16, "Protection of Indoor Installations." C. Protect carpet tile against damage from constniction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of constructio:n period. Use protection methods indicated or recominended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. END OF SECTION 09681 SECTION 09681—CARPET TILE Page 5 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 SECTION 09720-WALL COVER[NGS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Owner provided artwork—contractor supplied material. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 9 Section "Painting" for primin;�wall surfaces. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide�� wall adhesives with the following fire-test- response characteristics as determined by testing identical products applied with identical adhesives to substrates per test method indicate�d below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. l. Surface-Burning C}iaracteristics: As follows,per ASTM E 84: a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. b. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. 1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Enviromnental Limitations: Do not install wall coverings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. B. Lighting: Do not install wall covering until a permanent level of lighting is provided on the surfaces to receive wall c�vering. C. Ventilation: Provide continuous ventilation during installation and for not less than the tiine recommended by wall-covering manufacturer for full drying or curing. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: Mildew-resistant, nonstaining, strippable adhesive, for use with specific wall covering and substrate application,as recominended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer SECTION 09720—WALL COVERINGS Page 1 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 B. Priiner/Sealer: Mildew-resistant primer/sealer complying with requirements in Division 9 Section "Painting" and as recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer for intended substrate. C. Wall Liner: Nonwoven, synthetic underlayment and adhesive as recoinmended by wall- covering manufacturer. D. Seam Tape: As recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for levelness, wall plumbness, maximum moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation. B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair wall covering's bond, including mold, mildew, oil,grease,incompatible primers,dirt, and dust. C. Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean, structurally sound surface free of flaking, unsound coatings, cracks,and defects. 1. Moisture Content: Maxiinum allowable moisture content shall not be greater than 5 percent on new plaster, concrete, and concrete masonry units when tested with an electronic moisture meter. 2. Metals: If not factory primed,clean and apply rust inhibitive zinc metal priiner. 3. Gypsum Board: Prime with primer recommended by wall-covering manufacturer. D. Check painted surfaces for pigment bleeding. Sand gloss, seinigloss, and eggshell finishes with fine sandpaper. Treat areas susceptible to pigment bleeding. E. Remove hardware and hardware accessories,electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims, and similar items. F. Acclimatize wall-covering materials by removing them from packaging in the installation areas not less than 24 hours before installation. G. Install wall liner, with no gaps or overlaps, where required by wall-covering manufacturer. Form smooth wrinkle-free surface for finished installation. Do not begin wall-covering installation until wall liner has dried. SECTION 09720—WALL COVERINGS Page 2 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Cut wall-covering strips/panels in roll number sequence. Change roll numbers at partition breaks and corners. B. Install wall covering with no gaps or overlaps, no lifted or curling edges, and no visible shrinkage. C. Match pattern 72 inches above the finish floor�. D. Install seams vertical and plumb at least 6 inches from outside corners and 3 inches from inside corners unless a change of pattern or color exists at corner. No horizontal seams are pennitted. E. Fully bond wall covering to substrate. Remo�e air bubbles,wrinkles,blisters,and other defects. 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive at finished seams,perimeter edges,and adjacent surfaces. B. Use cleaning methods recommended in writin;g by wall-covering manufacturer. C. Replace strips that cannot be cleaned. D. Reinstall hardware and liardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims, and similar items. END OF SECTION 09720 SECTION 09720—WALL COVF.RINGS Page 3 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-]3 SECTION 09900—PAINTING PART 1 —GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This section includes surface preparation and fie:ld painting of the following: ]. Exposed interior items and surfaces. 2. Surface preparation,priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections. Revise paragraph below to suit the Project. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 9 Section"Gypsum Board Assemblies"for surface preparation for gypsum board. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. General: Standard coating tenns. 1. Flat refers to a sheen finish with a gloss range lower than 5 when measured with a 60-degree meter. 2. Eggshell refers to a lov�-sheen finish with a�;loss range between 5 and 10 when measured with a 60-degree meter. 3. Satin refers to a low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 10 and 20 when measured with a 60-degree meter. 4. Semi-Gloss refers to a medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 35 and 70 when measured with a 60-de�;ree meter. 5. Full gloss refers to a high-sheen finish with �i gloss range higher than 70 when measured with a 60-degree meter. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each paint system specified. Include block fillers and primers. 1. Material List: Provide an inclusive list of required coating materials.Indicate each ir�aterial and cross-reference specific coating, finish s;ystem,and application. Identify each inaterial by manufacturer's catalog number and coating rnaterial proposed for use. 2. Manufacturer's ]nformation: Provide manufacturer's technical information, including instructions for handling, storing and applyirig each coating material proposed for use. 3. Certification by the manufacturer that produ�,ts supplied comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compoundls(VOC's). B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colars available for each type of finish-coat material indicated. C. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified,two samples,minimum size 6 inches square,representing actual product,color,and patterns. SECTION 09900—PAINTING Page 1 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator that has completed painting system applications similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Liinitations: Obtain block fillers,primers and undercoat materials for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats. ].5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the Project Site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information: 1. Product name or title of material. 2. Product description (generic classification or binder rype). 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 4. Contents by volume,for pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Thinning instructions. 6. Application instructions. 7. Color name and number. 8. VOC content. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F(7 degrees C). Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling,mixing and application. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 and 90 degrees F(10 and 32 degrees C)unless otherwise stated on the technical data bulletin. B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 and 95 degrees F (7.2 and 35 degrees C). C. Do not apply paint in snow,rain, fog,or mist,ar when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, or at teinperatures less than 5 degrees F(3 degrees C)above the dew point,or to damp or wet surfaces. 1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying periods. 1.7 WARRANTY SECTION 09900—PAINTING Page 2 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 A. Warranty Period: One year after the date of Sub:;tantial Completion. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. PPG Architectural Finishes Inc. -Pittsburgh Paints. 2. Porter Paints 3. Architect Approved Equal. 2.2 PA1NT MATERIALS,GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers,pri�mers,undercoaters,and finish-coat materials that are compatible with one another and the substrat��s indicated under conditions of service and application,as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality"professional"paint material of the various coating types specified. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer"s product identification will not be acceptable. C. Color: Refer to Finish Schedule and Paint Legen�3 for paint colors. 2.5 INTERIOR PA1NT SYSTEMS A. Gypsum Board: Provide the following finish systems over interior gypsum board surfaces: 1. Low-Luster Acrylic Finish: STANDARD OPTION a. Primer: Pittsburgh�Paints; 6-2 SPEEDHIDE�Interior Latex Sealer Quick- Drying(98 g/L VOC); 1.0 to 1.3 Dry Mils. b. Finish Coats: Pittsburgh�Paints; 6-411 Series SpeedHide�Interior Enamel Eggshell Latex (67 g/L VOC); 3.0 to 3.4 Dry Mils. B. Structure or Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over ferrous metal: 1. Semi-Gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish(stair stringer,rails,hollow metal frames and doors) a. Primer: Pittsburgh�Paints; 90-;12 Series Pitt-Tech lnt/Ext Industrial DTM Primer/Finish Enamel (123 g/L VOC compliant as anti-corrosive product); 2.0 to 3.0 Dry Mils. b. Finish Coats: Pittsburgh�Paints; 90-��74 Series Pitt-Tech�Int/Ext Semi-Gloss DTM Industrial Enainels (192 g/L VOC compliant as anti-corrosive product); 4.0 to 6.0 Dry Mils. SECTION 09900—PAINTING Page 3 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 PART 3 —EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer,notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. C. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. 1. Notify Architect about anticipated problems when using the materials specified over substrates primed by others. 2. If a potential incompatibility of primers applied by others exists,obtain the following from the primer Applicator before proceeding: a. Confirmation of primer's suitability for expected service conditions. b. Confinnation of primer's abiliry to be top coated with materials specified. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories,plates,machined surfaces, lighting fixtures,and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of the item,provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations in each space or area,reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved. B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning. 1. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet,newly painted surfaces. C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. ]. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. 2. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove primers and reprime substrate. 3. Cementitious Substrates: Prepare concrete,brick,concrete masonry block,and cement plaster surfaces to be coated. Remove efflorescence,chalk, dust,dirt, grease, oils,and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing,use mechanical methods to prepare surfaces. a. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by coating manufacturer. SECTION 09900—PAINTING Page 4 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 b. Determine alkalinity and moisture conterit of surfaces by perfonning appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and burn,correct this condition before application. Do not coat surfaces if moisture content exceeds that pennitted in manufacturer's written instnictions. 4. Wood Substrates: Clean surfaces of dirt,oil,and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper,as required. Sinoothly sand surfaces exposed to view and dust off. a. Scrape and clean small,dry,seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer,before applying primer. b. Immediately on delivery,prime edges,e�Ids, faces,undersides,and backsides of wood to be coated. c. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. 5. Ferrous Metal Substrates: Clean ungalvanizf,d ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop coated;remove oil,grease,dirt,loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply wiith SSPC recommendations. a. Blast-clean steel surfaces as recommended by coating manufacturer and according to SSPGSP 10. b. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled cle�an metal with a metal treatment wash coat before priming. c. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire brush, solvent clean,and touch up with same primer as the shop coat. 6. Nonferrous-Metal Substrates: Clean nonferrous and galvanized surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions for the ty�pe of service,metal substrate, and application reyuired. a. Remove pretreatment from galvanized s�ieet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods. D. Material Preparation: Carefully mix and prepare coating materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying coatings in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Stir inaterials before applying to produce a rriixture of unifonn density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into the inaterial. Remove film and, if necessary, strain coating material before using. 3. Use only the type of thinners approved by manufacturer and only within recommended limits. 4. Tinting: Tint each undcrcoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when multiple coats of same material are applied. Tint undercoats to�natch the color of the finish coat,but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. 3.3 APPLICATION A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of rnaterial being applied. SECTION 09900—PAINTING Page 5 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 B. General: Apply high-performance coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use applicators and techniques best suited for the material being applied. 2. Do not apply high-performance coatings over dirt,rust, scale,grease,moisture, scuffed surfaces,or conditions detrimental to forming a durable coating film. 3. Coating surface treatments,and finishes are indicated in the coating systein descriptions. 4. Provide finish coats compatible with primers used. 5. The tenn "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when pennanent or built-in fixtures, convector covers,grilles, covers for finned-tube radiation,and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas,as required,to maintain system integrity and provide desired protection. C. Application Procedures: Apply coatings by brush,roller, spray,or other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. The number of coats and film thickness required is the same regardless of application method. 2. Completed Wark: Match approved Samples for color,texture,and coverage. Remove, refinish, or recoat wark that does not comply with specified requirements. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at any time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when paint is being applied: 1. Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to sainple paint material being used. Samples of material delivered to Project will be taken,identified, sealed, and certified in the presence of Contractor. 2. Owner may direct Contractor to stop painting if test results show material being used does not comply with specified requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint from Project site,pay for testing,and repaint surfaces previously coated with the noncomplying paint If necessary, Contractor may be required to reinove noncomplying paint from previously painted surfaces if,on repainting with specified paint, the two coatings are incompatible. 3.5 CLEANING A. After completing painting,clean glass and paint spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping without scratching or damaging adjacent finished surfaces. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades,whether being painted or not,against damage from painting. Correct damage by cleaning,repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect. B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting operations,reinove teinporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work. C. After work of other trades is complete,touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces END OF SECTION 09900 SECTION 09900—PAINTING Page 6 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 SECTION 10505 - METAL LOCKERS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Standard metal lockers. B. See Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for furring, blocking, and shims required for installing inetal lockers and concealed within o�ther construction before metal locker installation. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of locker and accessory indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans,elevations, sections,details, and attachments to other work. 1. Show layout and dimensions of lockers, locker fillers,trim, sloping tops and accessories. 2. Include locker identification/numbering system. C. Samples: For each exposed finish and for each color and texture required for units with factory- applied color finishes. D. Maintenance data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Where metal lockers are indicated to comply with accessibiliry requirements, comply with the U.S. Archit��ctural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans witli Disabilities Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibiliry Guidelines for Buildings and Faciilities". 1. Provide hardware that does not require �tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist, and that operates with a force of not more than 5 lbf. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard fonn in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of inetal lockers that fail in materials or workmanship, excluding finish, within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period for Metal Lockers: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. SECTION 10505—METAL LOCKERS Page 1 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 2. Failures include, but are not limited to, structural failure, faulty operation of latches and other door hardware, deterioration of inetals, metal finishes, and other related materials beyond normal wear. 3. Damage from deliberate destruction and vandalism is excluded. PART2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Cominercial Steel (CS), Type B, suitable for exposed applications. B. Expanded Metal: ASTM F 1267, Type II (flattened), Class I, 3/4-inch (19-inm) steel mesh, with at least 70 percent open area. C. Steel Tube: ASTM A 500,cold rolled. D. Fasteners: Zinc- or nickel-plated steel, slotless-type, exposed bolt heads; with self-locking nuts or lock washers for nuts on moving parts. 2.2 STANDARD METAL LOCKERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: 1. Penco Products, Inc. 2. Architect approved equal. B. Locker Arrangement: Double tier. C. Material: Cold-rolled steel sheet. D. Body and Shelves: Assembled by riveting or bolting body components together. Fabricate from unperforated 0.024-inch (0.61-mm)nominal-thickness steel sheet. E. Frames: Channel formed; fabricated from 0.060-inch (1.52-mm) nominal-thickness steel sheet; lapped and factory welded at corners; with top and bottom inain frames factory welded into vertical main frames. Fonn continuous,integral door strike full height on vertical main frames. F. Doors: One piece; fabricated from 0.060-inch (1.52-imn)nominal-thickness steel sheet; fonned into channel shape with double bend at vertical edges and with right-angle single bend at horizontal edges. 1. Doors less than 12 inches (305 mm) wide may be fabricated from 0.048-inch (1.21-mm) nominal-thickness steel sheet. 2. Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard reinforcing angles, channels, or stiffeners for doors more than 15 inches (381 mm)wide; welded to inner face of doors. 3. Stiffeners: Manufacturer's standard full-height stiffener fabricated from 0.048-inch (1.21-mm)nominal-thickness steel sheet;welded to inner face of doors. 4. Door Style: Louvered vents at top and bottom. SECTION 10505—METAL LOCKERS page 2 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 G. Hinges: Welded to door and attached to door frame with no fewer than two factory-installed rivets per hinge that are completely concealled and tamper resistant when door is closed; fabricated to swing 180 degrees. 1. Continuous Hinges: Manufacturer's standard, steel, full height. H. Projecting Door Handle and Latch: Finger-lift latch control designed for use with either built-in combination locks or padlocks; positive automatic latching, chromium plated; pry and vandal resistant. 1. Latch Hooks: Equip doors less than 4.? inches (1067 mm) high with two latch hooks; fabricated from 0.105-inch(2.66-mm)nominal-thickness steel sheet; welded or riveted to full-height door strikes;with resilient sil��ncer on each latch hook. 2. Latching Mechanism: Manufacturer's standard, rattle-free latching mechanisin and moving components isolated to prevent metal-to-metal contact, and incorporating a prelocking device that allows locker door to be locked while door is open and then closed without unlocking or damaging lock or latching mechanism. Provide strike and eye for padlock. I. Equipment: Equip each metal locker with identification plate and the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. Double-Tier Units: One double-prong c��iling hook and two single-prong wall hooks. J. Accessories: L Continuous Metal Base: Fabricated from manufacturer's channel or zee shaped profiles in standard thickness, but not less thart 0.060-inch (1.52-mm) nominal-thickness steel sheet. a. Height: 4 inches (102 mm). 2. Continuous Sloping Tops: Fabricated from manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than 0.036-incll (0.91-mm)nominal•-thickness steel sheet. a. Closures: Vertical-end type. 3. Recess Trim: Fabricated from 0.048-inch(1.21-mm) nominal-thickness steel sheet. 4. Filler Panels: Fabricated from manufacturer's standard thickness,but not less than 0.036- inch (0.91-mm)nominal-thickness steel sheet. 5. Finished End Panels: Fabricated from 0.036-inch (0914-mm) nominal-thickness steel sheet. K. Finish: Baked enamel. � Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fabricate metal lockers square, rigid, and wit:hout warp and with metal faces flat and free of dents or distortion. Make exposed metal edges safe to touch and free of sharp edges and burrs. SECTION 10505—METAL LOCKERS Page 3 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 1. Fonn body panels, doors, shelves, and accessories from one-piece steel sheet unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide fasteners, filler plates, supports, clips, and closures as required for complete installation. B. Fabricate each metal locker with an individual door and frame; individual top, bottom, and back; and common intermediate uprights separating coinpartments. Factory weld frame members of each metal locker together to fonn a rigid,one-piece assembly. C. All-Welded Construction: Factory preassemble metal lockers by welding all joints, seams, and connections; with no bolts, nuts, screws, or rivets used in assembly of main locker groups. Factory weld main locker groups into one-piece structures. Grind exposed welds flush. D. Accessible Lockers: Fabricate as follows: L Locate bottom shelf no lower than 15 inches(381 mm)above the floor. 2. Where hooks, coat rods, or additional shelves are provided, locate no higher than 48 inches(1219 mm) above the floor. E. Hooks: Manufacturer's standard ball-pointed type,aluminum or steel; zinc plated. F. Continuous Base: Fonned into channel or zee profile for stiffness, and fabricated in lengths as long as practical to enclose base and base ends of inetal lockers; finished to match lockers. G. Continuous Sloping Tops: Fabricated in lengths as long as practical,without visible fasteners at splice locations; finished to match lockers. 1. Sloping-top corner fillers,mitered. H. Recess Trim: Fabricated with minimum 2-1/2-inch (64-min) face width and in lengths as long as practical; finished to match lockers. L Filler Panels: Fabricated in an unequal leg angle shape; finished to match lockers. Provide slip- joint filler angle formed to receive filler panel. J. Finished End Panels: Designed for concealing unused penetrations and fasteners, except for perimeter fasteners, at exposed ends of nonrecessed metal lockers; finished to match lockers. 1. Provide one-piece panels for double-row(back-to-back)locker ends. K. Center Dividers: Full-depth, vertical partitions between bottom and shelf; finished to match lockers. 2.4 STEEL SHEET FINISHES A. Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning, pretreating, and phosphatizing, apply manufacturer's standard thermosetting baked-enamel finish. Comply with paint manufacturer's written instructions for application,baking,and minimuin dry film thickness. SECTION 10505—METAL LOCKERS Page 4 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 B. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full ra��ge of colors and finishes. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Install level,plumb, and true; shim as required,using concealed shims. 1. Anchor locker runs at ends and at inter✓als recommended by manufacturer,but not more than 36 inches (910 inm) o.c. Using concealed fasteners, install anchors through backup reinforcing plates,channels,or blocking;as required to prevent metal distortion. B. All-Welded Metal Lockers: Connect groups together with standard fasteners, with no exposed fasteners on face frames. C. Equipment and Accessories: Fit exposed co�mections of trim, fillers, and closures accurately together to fonn tight,hairline joints,with concealed fasteners and splice plates. ]. Attach hooks with at least two fasteners. 2. Attach door locks on doors using security-type fasteners. 3. Identification Plates: Identify metal locl{ers with identification indicated on Drawings. a. Attach plates to each locker doo��, near top, centered, with at least two aluminum rivets. 4. Attach recess trim to recessed metal locicers with concealed clips. 5. Attach filler panels with concealed fasteners. Locate filler panels where indicated on Drawings. 6. Attach sloping-top units to metal lockers,with closures at exposed ends. 7. Attach finished end panels with fasteners only at perimeter to conceal exposed ends of nonrecessed metal lockers. 3.2 ADJUSTING,CLEANII�;G,AND PROTECTION A. Clean, lubricate, and adiust hardware. Adjust doors and latches to operate easily without binding. B. Protect metal lockers from damage, abuse, dust, dirt, stain, or paint. Do not pennit use during construction. C. Touch up marred finishes, or replace metal lackers that cannot be restored to factory-finished appearance. Use only materials and proc:edures recommended or furnished by locker manufacturer. END OF SECTION 10505 SECTION 10505—METAL LOCKERS Page 5 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,W ashington 07-16-13 SECTION 10522-FIRE EXTINGtJISHER CABINETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes fire protection cabinets for firf,extinguishers. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For fire protection cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Rated, Fire Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements in ASTM E 814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed. B. Coordinate size of fire protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated. C. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire protection cabinets with wall depths. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's standard fonn in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal lockers that fail in materials or workmanship, excluding finish, within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period for Fire Extinguisher Cabinets: One year from date of Substantial Completion. PART2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A ]008/A 1008M,Commercial Steel (CS),Type B. B. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666,Type 304. C. Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, 3 mm thick, Class 1 (clear). SECTION 10522—FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS Page 1 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 2.2 FIRE PROTECTION CABINET A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following: a. J. L. Industries,Inc., a division of Activar Construction Products Group. b. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. c. Potter Roemer LLC. d. An Architect Approved Equal. B. Cabinet Construction: Nonrated. C. Cabinet Material: Steel sheet. D. Semirecessed Cabinet: Cabinet box partially recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of trim indicated; with one-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend). Provide where walls are of insufficient depth for recessed cabinets but are of sufficient depth to accommodate semirecessed cabinet installation. 1. Rolled-Edge Trim. E. Cabinet Trim Material: Same material and finish as door. F. Door Material: Steel sheet. G. Door Style: Vertical duo panel with frame. H. Door Glazing: Tempered float glass(clear. I. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type far cabinet type,trim style,and door material and style indicated. J. Accessories: 1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to fire protection cabinet, of sizes reyuired far types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated,with plated or baked-enamel finish. 2. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size,spacing,and location. a. Identify fire extinguisher in fire protection cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER." 1) Location: Applied to cabinet door. 2) Application Process: Decals. 3) Lettering Color: Red. 4) Orientation: Vertical. K. Finishes: SECTION 10522—FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS Page 2 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 1. Steel: Baked enamel or powder coat. a. Color and Gloss: White. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fire Protection Cabinets: Provide manufachirer's standard box (tub), with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. Miter and weld joints and grind smooth. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 1NSTALLATION A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable fi•aming depth and blocking where semirecessed cabinets will be installed and prepare recesses as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style. B. Install fire protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated. C. Fire Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to st:ructure, square and pluinb. D. Adjust fire protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly. E. Replace fire protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION 10522 SECTION 10522—FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINE'TS Page 3 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 SECTION 10523 -FIRE EXTINGUISHERS PART ] - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes portable,hand-carried fire ext:�inguishers. B. See Division 10 Section "Fire Extinguisher Cabinets" for fire protection cabinets for fire extinguishers. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of fire extinguisher indicated. Include rating and classification, material descriptions, dimensions of individua.l components and profiles, and finishes for fire extinguisher. B. Operation and inaintenance data. C. Product Schedule: For fire extinguishers. Coo�rdinate final fire extinguisher schedule with fire protection cabinet schedule to ensure proper fit and function. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire e:titinguishers to comply with NFPA ]0, "Portable Fire Extinguishers." B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire protection cabinets to ensure fit and function. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard f�nn in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include,but are not limited to,tr�e following:� a. Failure of hydrostatic test accordin�g to NFPA 10. b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers. SECTION 10523—FIRE EXTINGUISHERS Page 1 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size,and capacity for each fire protection cabinet indicated. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following a. Ansul Incorporated; Tyco International Ltd. b. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group. c. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. d. Potter Roemer LLC. e. An Architect approved equal. 2. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA ]0, Appendix B. B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container : 4-A:60-B:C, 10-1b nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameled-steel container. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 1NSTALLATION A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. 1. Remove and replace damaged,defective,or undercharged fire extinguishers. B. Install fire extinguishers in locations indicated and in compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. END OF SECTION 10523 SECTION 10523—FIRE EXTINGUISHERS Page 2 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 SECTION 10801 -TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIF;S PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: l. Public-use washroom accessories. 2. Custodial accessories. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for blocking for accessory anchorage. 2. Division 7 Section"Sealants" 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of toilet accessory item and product indicated. l. Including construction details relative to inaterials, dimensions, gages,profiles,mounting method, specified options,and finishes. B. Setting drawings showing where cutouts are required in other work, including templates, substrate preparation instructions, and directions for preparing cutouts and installing anchorage devices. C. Product Schedule: Indicate type, quantity, size, and installation location by room for each accessory required. 1. Use the fonnat of the schedule and room designations indicated on the Drawings to identify products and installation locations. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate accessory locations with other wor�:to prevent interference with clearances required for access by disabled persons, and for proper installation, adjusrinent, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories. B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work. SECTION 10801—TOILET AND BATH ACCESSOItIES Page 1 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for accessories is based on products indicated in the "Toilet and Bath Accessories" schedule. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Bobrick Washroom Equipinent, Inc. 2. Architect Approved Equal B. See"Toilet and Bath Accessories Schedule on the Drawings. 2.2 CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for accessories is based on products indicated. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following: l. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 2. Architect Approved Equal 2.3 FABRICATION A. General: One, maximum 1-1/2-inch-diameter, unobtrusive stamped manufacturer logo, as approved by Architect, is pennitted on exposed face of accessories. On interior surface not exposed to view or back surface of each accessory,provide printed,waterproof label or stamped nameplate indicating manufacturer's name and product inodel number. B. Surface-Mounted Toilet Accessories: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with continuous stainless-steel hinge. Provide concealed anchorage where possible. C. Recessed Toilet Accessories: Fabricate units of all-welded construction, without mitered corners. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, stainless-steel hinge. Provide anchorage that is fully concealed when unit is closed. D. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 1NSTALLATION A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. SECTION 10801—TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES Page 2 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downwarcl load of at least 250 lbf (1112 N), when tested according to method in ASTM F 446. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation of all moving parts. Replace damaged or defective items. B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatiugs. C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.3 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES SCHEDULED A. See architectural Drawings for "Toilet and Bath Accessories Schedule", listing basis-of-design manufacturer's products. END OF SECTION 10801 SECTION 10801—TOILET ANI) BATH ACCESS01�2IES Page 3 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 SECTION 11451 -RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: ]. Refrigerator/freezer. 2. Garbage Disposal. 3. Microwave. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples: For each exposed finish. C. Appliance Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings. D. Maintenance data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An einployer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer for installation and maintenance of units required for this Project. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to� authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. C. Residential Appliances: Comply with NAECA standards. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard :Fonn in which manufacturer of each appliance specified agrees to repair or replace residential appliances or coinponents that fail in materials or worlcmanship within specified warranty peri��d. 1. Microwave Oven: ten-year limited warranty for on-site service on defects in the magnetron tube. 2. Refrigerator/Freezer: Five-year limite�� warranty for in-home service on the sealed refrigeration system. 3. Dishwasher: 10-year warranty for in-home service against deterioration of tub and door liner. SECTION 11451 -RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES Page 1 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm,Washington 07-16-13 PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 2.2 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES A. Refrigerator/freezer: Freestanding side-by-side refrigerator with freezer,UL listed. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Whirlpool WRS325FDAM -with ice maker. 2. Defrosting: Frost-free 3. Color: Stainless B. Microwave Oven: UL listed. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Whirlpool WMC30516AS 2. Wattage: 1200 w. 3. Color: Stainless 2.3 CLEANING APPLIANCES A. Garbage Disposal: UL Listed 1. Basis-of-Design Product: InSinkErator Badger 1 2. HP: 1/3 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 1NSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Built-in Equipment: Securely anchor units to supporting cabinets or countertops with concealed fasteners. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper functioning and rough openings are completely concealed. B. Freestanding Equipment: Place units in final locations after finishes have been completed in each area. Verify that clearances are adequate to properly operate equipment. END OF SECTION 11451END OF SECTION 11451 SECTION 11451 -RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES Page 2 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm, Washington 07-16-13 SECTION ].1. 1 SECURITY EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 DESCRIPTION A. All work under this section is subject to the Contract Documents and this sub-contractor shall be respor..sible for and governed by all requirements thereunder. B. Furnish and install security equipment indicated. C. Refer to the drawings and details for location, quantity, and left or right hand type of equipment and a��paratus required. D. Install equipment as indicated on the drawings and in accordance with approved shop drawings, instructior�s and recommendations of the manufacturer. E. Unit Prices 1. Include with bid a unit price of hourly labor rate to install additional security equipment (include both regular and overtime) . F. Quality assurance: 1. Al1 equipment and materials h�=_rein specified by make or model is by Diebold Inc. , Hamilton, In�ternational Vault Inc. , or ADT, and shall be considered as a qual:ity standard. 2 . Other makes or manufacturers of the same equipment or material judged to be of the same qual:ity by the Architect or Architect' s representative will be accept<�ble. 1. 02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit sepia transparency of each tracing with 3 prints of each and 5 copies of each technical brochure to the General Contractor for approval by the Architect. B. Upon approval, furnish to the General Contractor the required copies for distribution. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 ALARM SYSTEM - NIC A. All alarm system work will be performed by the Owner under a separate contract 2. 02 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM - NIC A. Al1 video surveillance system work will be performed by the Owner under a separate cont.ract. MS City, St 101602 SECURITY EQUIPMENT (FF) 11. 1-1/3 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm, Washington 07-16-13 2 . 03 UNDERCOUNTER EQUIPMENT A. Furnish all labor, material and equipment necessary to fabricate, deliver and install at the jobsite, modular steel undercounter equipment as indicated below. B. Finish on units shall be baked enamel, color as selected by Architect from manufacturer' s standard colors. C. Undercounter equipment as follows: Item Q� Diebold Hamilton Cash Pedestal (3) SU-3-C HSTP-103 Cash Pedestal (sit down) (2) SD-3-C HSTP-103-1 Currency Tray w/ (4) M-1500-CT HSCT-308 w/ Locking Lid (1) M-1500-LC HSCT-211 (2) P-1500-BI HSCT-302 (2) P-1500-CI Supply Cupboard (3) SU-2-C HSTP-102 (Single) Knee Space Form Holder (3) AC-225-SX HSKS-104 w/Pin & Clip Tray /AC-1-H w/M-7-UD PART 3 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS, AS-BUILTS AND MANUALS 3. 01 SUBMITTALS A. Provide to the General Contractor, for the distribution to the Owner and the Architect, three complete sets of written operating and maintenance instructions for all security equipment and systems provided. C. Upon completion of all work under this section, instruct the Owner, in the presence of a representative for the General Contractor, in the operation and maintenance of all equipment and systems. Obtain the signature of the Owner' s Representative and General Contractor signifying acceptance of instruction and training on the operation and maintenance of equipment and systems. All keys are to be turned over to the Owner at this time, documented by transmittal signed by this sub-contractor and the Owner. 3.02 GUARANTEE A. This Contractor shall guarantee by acceptance of this subcontract, that all equipment, accessories and material provided by Contractor will be free of all defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from the issuance of certificate of substantial completion and acceptance by the Owner. MS City, St 101602 SECURITY EQUIPMENT (FF) 11. 1-2/3 OBEE Credit Union 601-01234 Yelm, Washington 07-16-13 END OF SE;CTION MS City, St 101602 SECURITY EQUIPMENT (FF) 11. 1-3/3